JP6736178B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a starting opening (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like.

JP, 2016-202930, A JP, 2016-198339, A JP, 2016-182376, A

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of effects by displaying a plurality of displays,
Production buttons that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of a meter image,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a button image display,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is to display the button image while the meter image is being displayed, increase the meter value of the meter image in association with the player's operation of the effect button, and increase the meter value. Suggests the jackpot expectations,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to perform a battle effect in which a player-side ally character and an enemy character compete against each other while the meter image is being displayed, and when the ally character wins, display the button image. Without suggesting the jackpot confirmation by filling the meter value of the meter image to full, the button image is displayed when the win of the enemy character is suggested , and is related to the player's operation of the effect button. Then, increase the meter value of the meter image, and suggest a jackpot expectation degree by the degree of increase of the meter value,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, amusement of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for explaining main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric power channel opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory view of a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flow chart of main side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 prior determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 prior determination process. It is a flow chart of normal operation processing. It is a flow chart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors product processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flow chart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart which shows sub-control main processing. 7 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a prefetch effect determination process. It is a figure for explaining the composition of a prior judgment information storage area. It is an explanatory view of a prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a core effect pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during fluctuation production. It is a flow chart of display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the state which the 1st movable accessory 14 moves. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st display effect of the 1st movable auditors product 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd display effect of the 1st movable auditors product 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 3rd movable accessory 18. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production A. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display effect B. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display effect C. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production D. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestive production A. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestive production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display frequency suggestive effect C. It is a figure for explaining timer display frequency suggestive effect D. It is a figure for explaining timer count production A. It is a figure for explaining timer count production B. It is a figure for explaining timer count production C. It is a figure for explaining timer count production D. It is a figure for explaining timer effect A. It is a figure for explaining timer effect B. It is a figure for explaining timer effect C. It is a figure for explaining timer production D. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display production A. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display production B. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display production C. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display production D. It is a figure for explaining image combination production A. It is a figure for explaining image combination production B. It is a figure for explaining image combination production C. It is a figure for explaining image combination production D. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production A. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production B. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production C. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production D. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon image matching effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon image matching effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon image matching effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon image matching effect D. It is a figure for explaining movable accessory impact production A. It is a figure for explaining movable accessory impact production B. It is a figure for explaining movable accessory impact production C. It is a figure for explaining movable accessory impact production D. It is a diagram for explaining a hold display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold display effect D. It is a figure for explaining zone production A. It is a figure for explaining zone production B. It is a figure for explaining zone production C. It is a figure for explaining zone production D. It is a figure for explaining cut-in production A. It is a diagram for explaining a cut-in effect B. It is a figure for explaining cut-in production C. It is a figure for explaining cut-in production D. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variable display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variable display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variable display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol variable display effect D. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production A. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production B. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production C. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production D. It is a figure for explaining meter production A. It is a figure for explaining meter production B. It is a figure for explaining meter production C. It is a figure for explaining meter production D. It is a figure for explaining related image display production A. It is a figure for explaining related image display production B. It is a figure for explaining related image display production C. It is a figure for explaining related image display production D. It is a figure for explaining battle production A. It is a figure for explaining battle production B. It is a figure for explaining battle production C. It is a figure for explaining battle production D. It is a figure for explaining cracking production A. It is a figure for explaining the crack production B. It is a figure for explaining cracking production C. It is a figure for explaining crack production D. It is a figure for explaining meter button production A. It is a figure for explaining meter button production B. It is a figure for explaining meter button production C. It is a figure for explaining meter button production D.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. Below, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 is made to match the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when a particular winning device receives a game ball, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is mounted inside the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer contour of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate). ) 62, effect button 63, sword member 64, sword button 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, and frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in the opening. The light guide plate 17 is a transparent flat plate member, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 is configured to be able to display an image on the main surface by being irradiated with light from the end surface of the light guide plate 17. The image displayed by the light guide plate 17 will be described later.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and shoots a game ball with a shooting strength according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation portion provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. It The sword member 64 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and produces a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center ornament 10, a fixed winning device (belt) 19, and an ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning The mouth 29 (ordinary winning hole 29), the outlet 16, and a display device 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails that guide the game ball are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3, and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, a second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8R are variably displayed, a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digested image display in which a reserved digested image 9C is displayed And an area. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digested image 9C is an image representing the hold and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C. The hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are also collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". The left effect design (left decorative design) 8L is displayed in the left design display area. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a combination of effect symbols displayed in the symbol display areas on the left, middle, and right, and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display device 41a and a second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a doublet of "777" or the like. If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a slash such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to understand the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or another mode may be used. The combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect for displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect". In addition, the variation effect of this decorative symbol counts the effect in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol as one variation effect (variation effect of one cycle). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. The effect symbols displayed in the second effect symbol display area are the same as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect symbol display area, and are smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is displayed.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, a big hit performance performed in parallel with a big hit game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like, in addition to the effect design variation effect. .. In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the effect symbol. Further, the image display device 7, in addition to the effect symbols, an identification display capable of suggesting that the special symbols are changing, or suggesting a lottery result of the special symbols (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying a reserved image 9A according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored second special figure reservations described later. A second hold display area for Due to the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. It is possible to display the number of memories of the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The held digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect design (effect design 8L, 8C, 8R) that is currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digested image 9C, the first special figure hold or (2) It can be displayed to the player that the special figure reservation is exhausted (“digestion of special figure reservation” described later) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In front of the image display device 7, a movable first so-called gimmick, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that four plate-shaped members (movable light guide plates) are movable in an oblique direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) at the four corners of the display device 7, and moves (extends) diagonally from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a to advance. It can be stationary in the position (Fig. 47). The first movable accessory 14 covers almost the entire image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center ornament 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick is attached to the center ornament 10. Further, on the back surface of the center ornament 10, a third plate movable body 18 (third movable accessory 18) not shown is arranged. A stage portion 11 is formed below the center ornament 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center ornament 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion from which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing from the inlet portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (belt) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning opening) in which the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. Port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity to obtain a big hit random number or the like and to make a big hit judgment.

The normal variable winning device (electric Chu) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is provided with a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entering opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol (big hit lottery). The power tube 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the operation of the movable member 23 opens and closes the second starting port 21. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric power solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The 2nd starting opening 21 can enter a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It should be noted that, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, it is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily than when the movable member 23 is in the closing state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery that determines whether or not to open the electric Chu 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of normal symbol random numbers (random number per hit) and the hit determination.

Here, "lottery for special symbols" means that when a game ball wins the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped (fixed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. The symbol matching game more effectively informs the player of the jackpot lottery result.

In addition, the "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not there is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but a variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed on the below-mentioned ordinary symbol display 42, and a predetermined variation is performed. When the time has passed, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lit or extinguished), and the player is informed of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30 and , V area 39, non-V area 70, and V opening/closing member 71. The first big winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first big winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first special winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening/closing member 71, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured in the first big winning device 31 as areas through which the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass. .. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. It becomes the 1st state (rotation state) which distributes to V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it becomes the 2nd state (stop state) which is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to non-V area 70. .. The V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of allocating the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be in the (second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive variation operating port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 does not serve as the probability variation operating port. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second special winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above and to the right of the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second special winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. Equipped with. The second special winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided below the game area 3. The outlet 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 3. The display device 40 is arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display device 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the way of striking the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, by hitting the right, the player can aim to pass through the gate 28, win the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display devices 40 are a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, an ordinary symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , A universal figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the memory number of the operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special symbol indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memories of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The universal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of memories of the operation hold (universal figure hold) of the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

After the special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), the stop symbol is displayed to draw a lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol) , Jackpot lottery) to inform the result. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol of a predetermined jackpot stop mode (jackpot symbol), the first big winning opening 30 in the open pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (type of jackpot hit) Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second special winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays the special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol by its lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see 1, 2, etc. from the left as follows: "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit up to display a jackpot pattern. In the case of a loss, a lost pattern in which only the LED on the far right is turned on, such as "●●●●●●●○", is displayed. You may employ|adopt the aspect which turns off all the LEDs as a loss design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined variation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning of a game ball (winning ball) into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the value (numerical value information) of various random numbers such as a jackpot random number acquired for the winning is obtained. , Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special drawing reservation, and if it is a winning in the second starting opening 21. , And is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the same for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special figure hold" means determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold, and executing variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even when a prize is won during or during the execution of a special game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are respectively constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on the LEDs by the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (variable display) the normal symbols, and then displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by performing a stop display. The ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed (ordinary symbol stopped symbol, ordinary symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal figure stop symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as the normally lost pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be alternately turned on. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit) acquired for the passage is stored as the universal symbol reservation in the universal symbol reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once remembered. There is an upper limit to the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The universal figure reservation stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the universal figure hold means that the normal symbol random number (random number per hit) corresponding to the universal figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of universal figure reservations is displayed on the universal figure reservation indicator 44. The universal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of universal figure reserves by turning on the LEDs for the number of public figure reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and the payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls a game profit such as a jackpot lottery and a game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, and a V area. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric power solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed inside the normal winning opening 29. The electric Chu solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric Chu 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81, the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b, the normal symbol display device 42, the first special symbol reservation display device 43a, the second special symbol reservation display device 43b, general figure reservation The display of the display 44 is controlled.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. To the payout control board 110, the prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to pay out the ball. The balls to be paid out are detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes the program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 is included. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as (including) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the speaker 67 to perform voice, music, and sound effects on the basis of the command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a panel lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a third movable accessory 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. To do. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc., lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern. The light emission of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The frame lamp 66 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the light guide plate 17 with light. By causing the LED to emit light, an image is displayed on the main surface (image display area) of the light guide plate 17. Further, the panel lamp 5 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the movable light guide plate of the first movable accessory 14 with light, and the main surface (image display area) of the movable light guide plate is illuminated by causing the LED to emit light. Display the image. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18, and the operation pattern data. According to the control of the movement of these movable accessories. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessory members 14, 15, and 18 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53, and that outputs a detection signal when a human body contacts. It may be connected.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)), a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, an ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7, the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

In the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B), a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation storage A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and it is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The V flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area in which counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, and random number counters, round counters, probability variation counters, time saving counters, and the like are set therein. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation processing described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reserved information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (holding information) for storing the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations, respectively, is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The universal figure reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reserved information) such as ordinary symbol random numbers (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth universal figure reservations, respectively. There are provided a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessory 14, 15 or the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer etc. is provided.

The pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, the core effect pattern determination table T52, the chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 are stored in the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A). .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in a sub-control main process (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a reserved ball count command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which a command output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 is set in the sub control main processing (described later) ( Output buffer), and a variation effect start command, a variation end command, a variation effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, a general figure hold effect counter. , A probability variation counter, a time saving counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the production control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", and "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" at the timing described later. Is configured. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for lottery (big hit determination) as to whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning big hit type (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number that is used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect showing the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7↓7") in which a combination of effect symbols showing a big hit is achieved. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit)" is used in a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric Chu 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variable pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting opening (the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). The random value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (random number per hit)” is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the universal symbol holding storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the "look-ahead effect random number" and the "chance up random number" at the timing described later. The “lookahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the lookahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetch effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the fluctuation start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C). Shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hitting determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "jackpot" or "miss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164 (165 to 65535). )”, it is indicated that it is determined as “miss”. Further, in the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be a “jackpot”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is shown to be "missed". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “the reach is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is determined to be “no reach”. The contents of the “time saving state” and the “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach in the short time state is less likely to be reached in the lost state than in the non-time save state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach-less loses with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the normal symbol random value obtained (any of 0-255) corresponds to "win" or "miss" It is a table referred to for determining whether to do. In FIG. 8(C), in the “non-time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2”, it is determined to be “win”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2 (3 ~255)", it is indicated that "miss" is determined. Further, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "winning", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , "Loss" is determined.

Normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), depending on the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state), determine how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol It is a table that is referred to in order to do. In FIG. 8(D), in the "non-time saving state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time reduction state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81, depending on the obtained jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127), "type of jackpot" and "special symbol" It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24" when the lottery for the first special symbol (special map 1) is won, it is determined that the jackpot type is "16RV planned big jackpot", The stop symbol 1 (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, in the case of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the big hit type random number value is "0 to 82", the big hit type is determined to be "16RV planned big hit", The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED)" of special game The "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passed jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired. .. In FIG. 10, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first start opening 20 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “miss”, the reach determination table T2 is determined to be “reach”, and the number of reserved balls is “1”. It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P7” when the fluctuation pattern random value is “0 to 60”. In FIG. 11, for example, in the time-saving state, the second start opening 21 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be a “jackpot”, the jackpot type determination table T5 is determined to be a “16RV scheduled jackpot”, and a variation pattern random value It is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be "P61" when is "0 to 10". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when the reach is reached, it is also determined whether the reach becomes the normal reach or the super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production in which the variation time after reach is longer than in normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the normal reach is performed and the execution is advanced. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-relation.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric charge opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the power tube 22 is determined to be the “open pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the open pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. In FIG. 12B, the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12 are shown. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once for the opening time and for 0.2 seconds in the opening time. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is 3, the opening time of each time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is opened. However, the opening of the electric chute 22 is closed even if the opening time remains, when there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (specified winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main processing (described later), according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9), the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening It is a table referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13(A), when the special symbol stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21. When the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the release pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the release It is shown that the pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22 and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first big winning opening 30 with the opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening number is once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second special winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first big winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) with the opening number of 1 time and the opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th Rs, and the opening number of 1 time and the opening time are opened in the 14th and 16th Rs The second special winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once at 15R and the opening number is once, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. .. In the opening pattern 23, the first special winning opening 30 with the opening time of 19.5 and the opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and the 15th opening, and the opening number is once and the opening time is opened at the 14th opening. The second special winning opening 35 is opened (short open) for 0.1 seconds, and the second special winning opening 35 is opened (long open) once at 16R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. .. However, the opening of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35, even if the opening time remains, if there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (regular winning number, maximum 9) Will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be the “opening pattern 31”, and the special figure stopping symbol. When the data is “13H”, the release pattern is determined to be the “release pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, the release pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 33” and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that when "15H" or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be the "open pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with the opening time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, and the opening time when the second winning occurs. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th Rs, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first winning, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second winning occurs, the opening time is increased. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R's, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. ..

4. Explanation of big hit etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hit" and "miss" as a result of big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. If you win the jackpot, you open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) in the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped (type of big winning) Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (a unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is finished. There is. Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ended by the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, namely, “V pass scheduled jackpot” and “V non-passage scheduled jackpot”. The "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passing planned opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the special figure stop design data 11H ~ 14H, 21H jackpot corresponds to "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), it is possible to pass the game ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing planned jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening/closing member 32, an opening/closing member 37, and an opening/closing member 37 in an opening pattern (V non-passing opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big hit that operates the V opening/closing member 71. Here, the special figure stop design data 15H, 22H big hit corresponds to "V non-passing big hit". When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass to 39. As described above, the opening patterns 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serve both as the V passage scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passage scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing planned jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot". The “16RV scheduled jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second special winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total round number is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total round number is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing big jackpot", 14R is a round in which a special winning opening is extremely short and a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 15R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “V non-passing jackpot” is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the opening pattern 22 in which the total round number is 16R, but the actual total round number is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. In other words, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

As is clear from the above description, "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" mean the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" are such that a time saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game ends. Is becoming That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability time saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot" allows the game ball to easily pass to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (highly accurate and high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time shortened state (low accurate high base state) or the high accurate time shortened state (high accurate high base state). In addition, after the time saving game is over, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low base state (normal state) in "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot", and the gaming state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot". However, it is apparently a high-accuracy low base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state becomes: It is a latent state (latency probable variation state) that the probability is high even though it is a highly accurate low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent latency probable state. In other words, "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" low-probability time-saving state (low probability High base condition) and "16R (actual 13R) V passing big jackpot" high-precision short-time state after jackpot game (high-accuracy high base state), and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" short-time end The subsequent low-probability low base state and the high-probability low base state after the time saving of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the planned V passage jackpot and 60/for the V non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery for the second special symbol (special map 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the planned V passing jackpot and 45/128 (for the V non-passing planned jackpot). 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first start opening 20, the game ball is won in the second start opening 21. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability variation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called "high probability state (high-probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and probability variation The states that are not controlled are simply called "normal probability states (non-high probability states, low probability states, normal states)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high-probability state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed, by the special symbol display 41 The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol becomes high.

In addition, the state where the game control microcomputer 81 controls the variation time reduction for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called "time saving state", and the state where the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time saving state". Say. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 has a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined such that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern used is judged. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, compared with the case where the variation time reduction control is not executed, the special symbol is variable. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control at the same time for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as a probability variation control of the normal symbol, the number of ordinary symbol random number values (random number values per hit) determined to be normal is more often in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. Using FIG. 8(C), a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, compared with the case where not performing the probability variation control, by the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal symbol is a hit symbol becomes high. In the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control for the electric Chu 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22. In the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the power tube 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and a state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. It should be noted that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning by the electric starting 22 to the second starting opening 21) is being executed. The high base state (power assist control state) does not have to execute all the above-mentioned controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 It suffices to execute the one or more controls so that the power tube 22 can be opened more easily than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric power control state) may be independently controlled without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V passing planned jackpot is a high-probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “high-accuracy high-base state” or a “high-accuracy short-time state”. Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a highly accurate and high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", " 16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”. "16RV scheduled jackpot" and "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", high-accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed Ends with. "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a high-accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here 100 times), and the high-accuracy low base state (latency confirmation change) State), or the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed to end.
In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is the normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never). State, that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate high base state" and "low accurate short time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state is "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, low accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number (100 times in this case) variable display of special symbols is executed, or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot The game ends when the game is executed.
When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time saving state, and the low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate low base state". The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a "normal game state" or a "low-probability non-time saving state (also simply referred to as non-time saving state)". In addition, a state during execution of the special game (big hit game) may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier to open the electric Chu 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, the player strikes right to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings at the starting opening) rather than hitting left. In the gaming machine 1, the right-handed game is played even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by letting the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric Chu 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and the winning of the first starting opening 20 is easier than the winning of the second starting opening 21. It is because it has become. From this, in the low base state, a left hit is performed in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to a win/loss determination means (FIG. 23) and a win/loss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counter, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on and is not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interruption processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7(A). , Normal symbol random value) is incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC and the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period (for example, 4 msec period). Then, after the main-side timer interrupt process is completed, until the next main-side timer interrupt process is started, the updating process of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is repeatedly executed. .. When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the main-side timer interrupt processing execution period and other periods (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). And both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 has a starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), a normal operation processing (step S104), a special operation processing (step S105), a V area sensor detection processing (step S106), a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the number of reserved balls is reached, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the special figure 2 reserved sphere number described later, and the first special figure based on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The normal symbol holding sphere number is the number of ordinary figures held, more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of held figures. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol holding balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value from the first to the general figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved number of balls is the number of second special figure reserved, more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 2 reservation sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing is done (step. S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -Value of TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (value of FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special diagram reservation storage area 85b for the later-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18). Memory (hold). After the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 prior determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved sphere number is the number of the first special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. If the number of special sphere 1 reserved spheres is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special sphere 1 reserved spheres (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved sphere number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special diagram reserved storage area 85a for the later-described special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 19). Memory (hold). After the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 pre-determination processing (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and performs jackpot pre-determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to refer to and the jackpot random number value to make a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot. Here, since the high-probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the high-probability state table (the big-hit determination value is “0” to “649”) from the big-hit determination table T1. Refer to and judge beforehand whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the "judgment" is pre-determined. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed by using the big hit judgment table T1 used in the big hit judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, for the pre-judgment different from the big hit judgment table T1. You may perform a prior determination using the jackpot determination table of.

When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is “miss” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first, the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-judgment of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined to be a "16RV scheduled jackpot". In addition, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a variation pattern pre-determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first, the variation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), Also, the reach random number value is acquired. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot preliminary determination result of step S304, The variation pattern is specified from the reach presence/absence pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the variation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all the fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, the reach loss is pre-determined, and when the variation pattern random value is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls is “1-2. , The selected variation pattern “P64” and the variation pattern “P68” selected if the number of reserved balls is “3 to 4”. In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for the preliminary determination different from

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a hit, and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created preliminary determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special map 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 pre-determination processing, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot predetermination (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 1-related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability variation flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81, in the jackpot determination table T1, the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164." It is pre-judged based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the “miss” is pre-determined. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. After that, the processes of steps S404 to S408 are similar to those of steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the power cable 22 is operating (step S501). If the power cable 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the power cable 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 in the state where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is once "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). , And then the holding is digested in this step S504 and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting mouth sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols becomes “1” once, and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, the normal symbol random value as the determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the universal figure reservation) of the universal figure reservation storage area 86 ( Random number value) is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state) and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "winning", and when the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be "miss". (See FIG. 8C).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and using the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the normal symbol variation Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). .. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variation time of the normal symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “miss” in the hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the hit determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a power-chu open pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric Chu 22 is selected with reference to the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric Chu operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric Chu 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is to be closed. It means that one of the things that have been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the power cable 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the power cable 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric Chu 22 to stop its operation (Step S521), and this processing To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing regarding the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is "1" of "special operation status", Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol changing process, the change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric auditors product processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol waiting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401). When the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number is decremented by 1 (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the suspension information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b to the side to be read from the current position. While shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it is reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been completed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection processing ( Information about the variation pattern (including information about variation time) set in step S1403) is included.

In step S1401, if the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). Toku-zu 1 When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first Toku-zu reservation storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning of the first starting opening 20 If not stored, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection processing, the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one toward the side where it is read from the current position. At the same time, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the first special figure pending storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are digested in the order in which they are reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are respectively on the right side. Shift one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 variation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. A fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection processing ( Information about the variation pattern (including information about variation time) set in step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, when the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination by, for example, turning on or off the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), the present process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol suspension is executed only when the second special symbol suspension is “0”. That is, the completion of the second special figure reservation is executed prior to the completion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special figure reservation is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot for passing V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The big hit determination process (step S1402) of FIG. 2 and the big hit determination process (step S1408) of FIG. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed by referring to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the big hit random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the toku-zu 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first to-be-held first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the high-probability state (probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on the table for the high-probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform jackpot determination ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the big hit random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF), whether the big hit is based on the table for the normal probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of special figure 2, the big hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of toku-zu 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is “miss”, the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the lost design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , This process ends.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The flow patterns of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of FIG. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is present is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the V-passing jackpot, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop pattern data that has been done.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the non-time saving state V-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passage planned jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. "To "P3", and in FIG. 2 the variation patterns "P21" to "P23") are referred to (addresses are set). From the read variation pattern random number value, one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, and one of “P21” to “P23” is selected in the special figure 2.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing planned jackpot, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random value of the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence/absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since the state is the non-time saving state, the reach determination is performed based on the table for the non-time saving state (the reach presence determination value (reach success random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach success random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) is in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-time saving state reachable loss, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the reachable loss (the variation pattern in FIG. 1 is "P7"- The portion of "P14", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P24" to "P31" in special figure 2) is referred to. In special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the variation pattern from the read random number value of the variation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the variation pattern from the read random number value of the variation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres of special figure 2 (1 to 4). Since the fluctuation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls operates. That is, in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than that when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Shorter fluctuation patterns are being selected more. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which the special figure is reserved.

When the reach random number value is not the reach success random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reachless loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time saving state loss without reach, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, a portion corresponding to loss without reach (in FIG. 1, the variation pattern is “P15”- The portion of "P16", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In Toku-zu 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In this case as well, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls operates.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 are the same as the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618 and S1619 are already described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608 and S1609. Different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned V passing jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. Is a part of "P41" to "P43", and the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and any of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Toku-zu 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 (“P44 -"P46" portion) is referred to. One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the present process. Information on the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of special symbols is started.

[Special symbol changing process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. When the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saved, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this processing. Thereby, the jackpot game is not started, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is entered again, and the jackpot determination or the like for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot that was won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, the “opening pattern 31” is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot together with the setting of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The gaming state reset process is a process for resetting the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (returning to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter is for counting the number of variations of special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set to the probability variation counter at the time of shifting to the high probability state (substantially, the high probability state continues until the next big hit). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). When the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is for counting the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100" in the low accurate high base state, and the time saving counter is set to "100" or "10000" in the high accurate high base state. (Set to "100" for "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (probability variation latent jackpot), "10000" for "16RV scheduled jackpot" and "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot". Be done). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1 (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the current game state that has just been set (whether it is a probability variation state, a probability variation counter value, whether it is a time saving state, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, and therefore in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric auditors product process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “big hit end flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern is all ended in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Then, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls is won. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). When it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203). For the time to open the special winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the opening start time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that has been temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (close time) has passed and the time to start opening again is reached. When it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the special winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that the opening of the special winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After the round designation command is set, this processing ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes at the special winning opening in the round game has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the special winning opening is reached. That is, any one of the above (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the special winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

In the above-mentioned step S2203, when it is not the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has passed since the special winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed after closing the special winning opening. When the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this processing ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) in the case where there is a passage of the game ball into the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing big jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing schedule". It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V area 39 by "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It is possible to recognize that there is no passage of the game ball into the V area 39 by "." The ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the end of the big hit, the big hit end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed since the final round has ended. (Step S2230). When the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V open/close member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", "5". When it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

When it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first prize flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). When the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short circuit in either case of "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short open (here, 0.1 second) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, since the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, the first game ball winning the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V valid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit (0.1 second in this case) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and is opening the V opening/closing member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V valid period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including a case where the big hit game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The V effective period includes a few seconds (ball brush period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed because the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a have a physical distance. This is in consideration of the period until the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball that has entered the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to turn it on. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see a gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned ON based on the V passage due to an illegal act, and the high probability state is not set. After the V open/close member 71 is short-circuited and the V effective period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second prize flag” is a flag that indicates that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). When it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, when it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). When the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum round game time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), it is generally the second prize. The time from time to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 causes the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 to be relatively long. Is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 to the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the special winning opening. Make a decision.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) elapses after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, in the V invalid period. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not finished (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, if a short opening is made, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the present process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present processing is ended while the V effective period is continued.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). When the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this processing ends.

[Game state setting process]
32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes the "non-high probability state", the "time saving state", and the "high base state" (that is, the low certainty high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next big hit is won, and either condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "100" or "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). More specifically, "100" when "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (probability latent latent variation jackpot), "10000" when "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot". Is set. As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a highly accurate high base). This highly accurate high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or 10000 times, or the next big hit is won, and the condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game state thereafter becomes the high-accuracy low base state, and the high-accuracy state is hidden.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, it is a big jackpot before the jackpot lottery is performed 10,000 times in the highly accurate and high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the time saving state, the jackpot (special symbol stop symbol data 21H) scheduled to pass V is during the jackpot game. If V is passed, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a highly accurate and high base state until the next jackpot.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection processing (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball (step S2601). When the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. To be done. When it is not in the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and finishes this processing. ..

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved sphere number command is a command for notifying the reserved sphere number to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number. .. After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of Performance Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, the random number values may be added one by one or two or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub-side timer interrupt process is completed and before the sub-side timer interrupt process is started next.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect in-progress process (step S4305). The variation production process is processing for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variation production to execute the specific display production on the display screen 7a, and the details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect mid-process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect in which voice is output from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and ends this processing. In other processing, for example, random number updating processing or the like is performed.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "prefetching effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern to be executed. Details of the prefetch effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the prefetching effect determination process described above is skipped. The prefetching effect is an effect that suggests that the pending information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is likely to include a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94, based on the information about the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number included in the reserved sphere number command. The values of the first special figure holding effect counter, the second special figure holding effect counter, and the general figure holding effect counter that have been obtained are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter, 9B is updated. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned reserved display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variation effect start process” is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the variation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuating effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuating stop command, and sets a fluctuating effect ending command for ending the fluctuating effect. As a result, the decorative design corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the fluctuation effect ending process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets, in the opening command, information on the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect that is set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set as the effect command setting area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Read out from the display screen and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), a round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or during the interval between the opening in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When it is received (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information regarding special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high-probability state, whether it is a time-saving state, a certain change). The counter, the value of the time saving counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed V when it receives the V passage command. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) other than the above, and ends this process.

[Prefetching effect determination process]
38 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and a variation included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-reading effect pattern information in addition to the above-described big hit determination information, big hit type information, and variation pattern information. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39(A), the jackpot determination information “Loss” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third of the special figure 2 reservations, respectively. The state is shown in which the result is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that the special figure 2 has been won from the state of FIG. 39(A), and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth piece of the special figure 2 reserved. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, in addition, the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special figure 2 reservations and the corresponding areas corresponding to the variation are respectively referred to as “pattern A” as prefetch effect pattern information. Is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the preliminary determination information shift processing has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the preliminary determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and The pre-determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is not stored in the relevant area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the prefetching effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the prefetching effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether or not it is “big hit” or “miss with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “miss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform look-ahead production. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit” or “miss with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution judgment for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, Also, the prefetch effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the pre-reading effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the pre-reading effect. Whether or not to perform it, and the prefetching effect pattern for performing the prefetching effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is “big hit” and the pre-reading effect random value is “0 to 55”, the pre-reading effect is “none”, and when the pre-reading effect random value is “56 to 67”, the pre-reading effect is When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random value is "68 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. When the pre-determination result is “miss with reach” and the look-ahead effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random number value is “108 to 114”, the look-ahead effect is used. When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random value is "115 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. The type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random number value can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetching effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetching effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the prefetching effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area prior to the corresponding storage area is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is “pattern A” set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also, set “Pattern A”. As a result, the pre-reading effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress status of the variable effect. That is, in the variation effect, if the timing to execute the prefetching effect has already passed, the prefetching effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the prefetching effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process is ended.

[Variable production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets, in the sub RAM 94, information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the variation start command, and information regarding the variation pattern. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process includes a basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, displaying a background image on the image display device 7 and switching thereof, displaying a predetermined character and its operation, outputting a melody or a sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing an additional effect such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform normal reach production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP1 production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP2 production, and a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP3 production, A plurality of types of core effect patterns that perform a loss effect without reach are set. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach effect loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance up random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the chance up effect pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33" "P41" to "P56" "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed, etc. May be determined. From these, what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this processing. A variation time (FIG. 42) according to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variation effect during processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation production is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. When the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. The effect contents are switched or a specific image is displayed in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before change end (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the command before change end including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation-end command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetching effect of displaying the prefetching effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, if the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the notice fade effect of fading the notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). When it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the pre-variation end command is received from the sub control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetch effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and when the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even when the pre-variation end command does not include the prefetch effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is displayed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the variation effect end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). When it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In the other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads the predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image designated by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing is ended.

9. Operation/display effect of movable board and display effect of light guide plate 17 With reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, movable body (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, and third movable accessory). The operation of 18), the display effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the display effect of the light guide plate 17 will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 during the game operation (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. Take control. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 irradiates the end faces of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 with light during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like, thereby causing a specific image. Is displayed.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a state in which the first movable accessory 14 moves.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14.
The first movable accessory 14 includes four transmissive members (movable light guide plates), each of which is configured to be movable. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) have a substantially rectangular shape. The first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable accessory 14 can move from the state of FIG. 1 to the upward position (expanded position) shown in FIG. 47 by moving (advancing) upward, and there, It can be stationary (second mode). In the second aspect, the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) cover almost the entire display screen 7 a on the front surface of the image display device 7. Further, the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) four transparent members (movable light guide plates) from the state of FIG. 47. , You can rest there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a first display effect of the first movable accessory 14. The main surface of the four transparent members (movable light guide plate) is an image display area, and a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is displayed there. be able to. When the first board movable body 14 is in the second mode, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a second display effect of the first movable auditors product 14. The character images MJ of "s", "ma", "a", and "le" can be displayed in the image display areas of the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates). The first movable accessory 14 can independently switch the four character images MJ of “S”, “Ma”, “A”, and “L” between a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view illustrating the display effect of the light guide plate. The light guide plate 17 can display a plurality of smile images SL (here, seven) at different positions on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 can independently switch the seven smile images SL into a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the second mode of the second movable accessory 15.
The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body whose face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) in which the rotating body is stored in the center ornament 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. From the state of FIG. 1, the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 can move downward and perform a rotation effect in front of the display screen 7a (second mode).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory view illustrating the second aspect of the third movable accessory 18.
The third movable accessory 18 is configured such that a frame-shaped member is movable up and down and can stand still at the retracted position (home position) (first mode). When the third movable accessory 18 is located at the home position, the player cannot see it. By moving (advancing) downward from the home position, the third movable accessory 18 can be moved to the advancing position (deployment position, deployment position) shown in FIG. 52 and can be stopped there (second mode). ). In the second mode, the third movable accessory 18 covers a part of the image display device 7 as viewed from the player. Further, the third movable accessory 18 can be moved to the home position by moving (retracting) from the state of FIG. 52, and can be stopped there.

The third movable accessory 18 has a frame shape and is formed in a rhombus shape. When the third movable accessory 18 is in the deployed position (in the case of the second mode), the display on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 can be visually recognized from the hollow portion surrounded by the frame-shaped portion.

10. Example effects, effect examples, modifications, and aspect examples of the present embodiment Below, each example effect (display effect example, accessory moving effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modified example, and an aspect example with respect to the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, pre-determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The next timer value display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. This next timer value display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the next timer value display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Next timer value display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the next timer value display effect A. In the next timer value display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this state, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 53(C) and 53(D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 5 seconds), the value that should be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is expanded to the current timer value. It is also displayed. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 53(D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” having transparency and overlapping the current timer value “5” is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT is transparent, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral "4" are images that are outside the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(E), the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT is reduced in size in a state where it overlaps with the timer image TM1, and the size and display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is represented. In other words, the next timer value image NT is reduced so as to fit in the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. Clement is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position match the portion "5" of the timer image TM1 and the timer image is displayed as "4" of the next timer value image NT. Immediately after the size and position of "5" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the second next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Similar to FIG. 53D, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. Here, the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "4", and the value "3" to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value "4". The next timer value image NT representing "3" is enlarged and displayed with transparency, and overlaps with the current timer value "4", and the upper and lower ends of the numeral "3" protrude from the display screen 7a. It is in a state. After that, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT approaches the number part (counter value part) of the timer image TM1 while being reduced while overlapping with the timer image TM1. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 53(H). Here, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and display position of the next timer value image NT are the same as the "4" portion of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT, "3" and the timer image. Immediately after the size and position of "4" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes "3". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

When the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlarged display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect as described above, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. 53(I). A timer zero display effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed, an expectation suggestion image EI1 that suggests the expectation of the big hit in the variation is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the next timer value display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54C, the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "30", the value "29" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "30". In FIG. 54(C), the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the current timer value “30”. Since the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed, a part of the next timer value image NT sometimes protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54D, the reduction rotation effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT moves toward the timer image TM1 while rotating and reducing, and overlaps with the timer image TM1. After that, the reduction is continued while overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and direction of the numeral portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1 and the display position approach. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 54(E). Here, the next timer value image NT representing "29" is reduced so that the size and display position match the portion "30" of the timer image TM1 and the next timer value image NT "29" and the timer image. Immediately after the size and position of "30" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes "29". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

In the next timer value display effect B, the content of the next timer value display effect changes at random. As an example thereof, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when the timer value is predetermined (here, “5”), the next timer value is not displayed and the timer image TM1 is decremented as it is. It As another example, as shown in FIG. 54(G), the same effect as the next timer value display effect A is performed. That is, the next timer value image NT representing "3" having transparency and overlapping the current timer value "4" is enlarged and displayed, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral "4" are projected from the display screen 7a. Then, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and the display position match the portion "4" of the timer image TM1, and "3" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image TM1. Immediately after the size and position of “4” of No. 4 match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with “4” as shown in FIG. 54(H). This completes the decrement of the timer image TM1.

As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value display effect with random contents, the timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed as shown in FIG. 54(I). After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed, an expectation suggestion image EI1 that suggests the expectation of the big hit in the variation is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the next timer value display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a 2-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

During the countdown of the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54(C). The second timer image TM2 has the same configuration as the first timer image TM1. The second timer image TM2 may have a different configuration from the first timer image TM1. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "09" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "09" means 9 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 55(D) to 55(G), in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, as in the next timer value display effect A, the next timer value enlarged display effect is generated. The countdown is executed by sequentially repeating the next timer value reduction effect and the decrement completion effect. In the next timer value enlarged display effect, specifically, when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (first value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the first timer image TM1. Is displayed together with the current timer value in the expanded state. Further, when the timer value of the second timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value (second value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the second timer image TM2 is enlarged and becomes the current timer value. It is also displayed. The first value and the second value which are triggers for starting the next timer value enlarged display effect may be the same value or different values. Further, the next timer value enlarged display effect may be started at the same timing as the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, or may be started at different timings. If the timings are different, the first timer image TM1 may be started first, or the second timer image TM2 may be started first.

In FIG. 55(D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is executed in both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2. The first timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "05", and the next timer value image NT1 representing the value "4" to be displayed next is enlarged and the current timer value "05" is displayed. It is also displayed. The next timer value image NT1 is transparent, and the first timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT1. Since the next timer value image NT1 is enlarged and displayed, the next timer value image NT1 is larger than the first timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral "4" are images that are outside the display screen 7a. The second timer image TM2 (current timer value) is "09", and the next timer value image NT2 representing the value "8" to be displayed next is enlarged and the current timer value "09" is displayed. It is also displayed.

In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55(E), the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1 is executed. Specifically, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT1 approach the number part (counter value part) of the first timer image TM1 while shrinking while overlapping with the first timer image TM1. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT1 substantially match the counter value portion of the first timer image TM1, the decrement of the first timer image TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 55(F). ..

The second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(E) shows a state in which the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT2 is finished and the decrement is completed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(F), the next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55(G), the next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(G), the decrement is completed after the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1. The decrement timings of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlarged display effect, the next timer value reduced effect, and the decrement completion effect, FIG. 55 ( As shown in H), in the first timer image TM1, the timer zero display effect in which the timer value is 0 (zero) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 55(I), at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, the first expectation suggesting image EI1 indicating the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(I), the timer zero display effect in which the timer value is 0 (zero) is performed, and in the position of the second timer image TM2 being displayed in FIG. 55(J). , A second expectation suggesting image EI2 indicating the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expectation suggesting image EI2 is an image suggesting that the expectation is higher than that of the first expectation suggesting image EI1.

[Next timer value display effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the next timer value display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a 2-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

During the countdown of the first timer image TM1, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54(C). The second timer image TM2 has a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. Each configuration will be described later. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "08" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "08" means 8 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 56(C) to 55(G), the first timer image TM1 is counted down while sequentially repeating the next timer value movement display effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56(C), in the next timer value movement display effect, the next timer value image NT1 “04” is displayed above the first timer image TM1 “05”. To be done. The next timer value image NT1 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56(D), "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves downward, and a part thereof is covered with "05" of the first timer image TM1 and disappears. As shown in FIG. 56(E), when "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves to the position of "05" of the first timer image TM1 and is covered by the first timer image TM1 and completely invisible, The value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by one. As shown in FIGS. 56F to 56G, this procedure is repeated, and the first timer image TM1 is counted down.

As shown in FIGS. 56(C) to 55(G), the second timer image TM2 is subjected to countdown while sequentially repeating the timer value movement effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the next timer value image NT2 "07" is displayed above the second timer image TM2 "08", and the second timer image TM2 is displayed. "09", which is the previous timer value image PT2, is displayed below. The next timer value image NT2 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the second timer image TM2. The previous timer value image PT2 is an image that represents the value that the second timer image TM2 displayed immediately before. A triangular arrow image YG is displayed on the left side of the second timer image TM2. As shown in FIG. 56(D), "07" of the next timer value image NT2, "08" of the second timer image TM2, and "09" of the previous timer value image PT2 are drawn downward while drawing an arc. Moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the second timer image TM2 is displayed at the position where the second timer image TM2 is displayed, that is, "07" of the next timer value image NT2 is located on the right side of the arrow image YG. The decrement of the image TM2 is completed. As shown in FIGS. 56(F) to 56(G), this procedure is repeated and the second timer image TM2 is counted down. The decrement timings of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, when the countdown is performed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, the timer value is 0 (zero) in the first timer image TM1 as shown in FIG. ) Timer zero display effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(I), at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, the first expectation suggesting image EI1 indicating the expectation of the big hit in the variation is displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56(I), a timer zero display effect in which the timer value is 0 (zero) is performed, and in the position of the second timer image TM2 displayed in FIG. 56(J). , A second expectation suggesting image EI2 indicating the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expectation suggesting image EI2 is an image suggesting that the expectation is higher than that of the first expectation suggesting image EI1.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the next timer value display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the timer image TM is displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a. The next timer value display effect in which the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed overlapping at least one minute of the timer image TM1. To be done. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has transparency, and the timer image TM1. Becomes visible through the next timer image NT. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is more than the timer image TM1 representing the first timer value. Is displayed as a large image, the first timer value is reduced so that it fits in the displayed image area, and the first timer value is replaced, whereby the second timer value becomes the timer image TM1. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the second timer image NT representing the second timer value has a portion of the second timer value from the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a projected image. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the next timer value display effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image TM1 reaches the predetermined value. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the next timer value display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the next timer value display effect of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TM is described as counting down. However, the timer image TM may be counted up. Further, the count value is not limited to numbers, and may be specific characters, figures, symbols, or the like. For example, the countdown may be a mode in which images such as a rabbit, a turtle, and a bear are displayed in order. It may also be a Roman numeral.

[Modification 2]
You may combine suitably each next timer value display effect of FIG. 53-FIG. For example, the timer image TM of FIG. 53 may have the same mode as the second timer image TM2 of FIG. Moreover, each of the next timer value display effects in FIGS. 53 to 56 may not include a part of the effect. For example, in FIG. 53, the expectation suggestive image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer value of the timer image TM is finally set to zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM may end at a value other than zero. For example, the first expectation suggestive image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2).

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image representing a timer value,
An effect in which an image representing a second timer value displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image is displayed on the display device while the timer image is displayed on the display device. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed so as to overlap at least one minute of the timer image.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image having transparency, and the timer image is visible through the image representing the second timer value. Machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-3,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image larger than the image representing the first timer value, and then fits in the image area in which the first timer value is displayed. The game machine characterized in that the second timer value becomes the timer image by reducing the first timer value and replacing the second timer value with the first timer value.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine described in Aspect A1-4,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image in which a part of the second timer value overflows from the display means.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-5,
The gaming machine is started after the timer value represented by the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer display count suggestive effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. This timer display number suggestion effect can be executed during the change of the special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer display number suggestion effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This timer display number suggesting effect is performed during one variation (one variation effect) of the special symbol. In addition, you may make it perform the timer display frequency suggestive effect during the change of the special symbol a plurality of times (a plurality of variable effects).

[Timer display count suggestion A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestive effect A.
In the timer display count suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the upper area of the timer display area XA1, a timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57(B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as “2 more timers”, which suggests that the timer display will appear two more times after the first timer count suggestive display effect.
The timer count suggestion display XA2 has a function of suggesting the number of timer displays that may appear in the future and also suggesting that the timer display is performed.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on the variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 57C shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value on the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(E), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57(E), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "1 more timer left", indicating that the timer display will appear once more after this second timer count suggestive display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(F), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 57(F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(G), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "Gekiatsu" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestive effect B.
In the timer display count suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the first timer number suggestive display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the upper area of the timer display area XA1, a timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58(B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as “2 more timers”, indicating that the timer display will appear two more times after this first timer count suggestive display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on the variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed as "1 more timer", which indicates that the number of times of the timer is suggested as compared with the time of the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by 1, indicating that the timer display will appear once more. FIG. 58C shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the second timer number suggestive display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58(E), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "1 more timer". After the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display appears once more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(F), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 58(F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(G), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "Gekiatsu" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestive effect C.
In the timer display count suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the upper area of the timer display area XA1, a timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59(B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 more timers", which suggests that the timer display will appear two more times after this first timer count suggestive display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on the variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer wait indication display XA5 is shown as "waiting for XX seconds", which indicates that the timer display is waiting and is about to start. In this case, the number of "X"s on the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value on the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of "X"s in the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is set to one and "Waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If the integer is 100 or more, the number of "X"s in the timer standby suggestion display XA5 may be three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. Further, it is not limited to “X”, and may be another alphabet or a symbol such as “◯”, “□”, “Δ”, “?”, “!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed as "1 more timer", which indicates that the number of times of the timer is suggested as compared with the time of the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by 1, indicating that the timer display will appear once more. FIG. 59(D) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59(F), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "1 more timer". After the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display appears once more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 59(F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(H), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "Gekiatsu" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestive effect D.
In the timer display count suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the upper area of the timer display area XA1, a timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60(B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 more timers", suggesting that the timer display will appear two more times after this first timer count suggestive display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on the variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer wait indication display XA5 is shown as "waiting for XX seconds", which indicates that the timer display is waiting and is about to start. In this case, the number of "X"s on the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value on the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of "X"s in the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is set to one and "Waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If the integer is 100 or more, the number of "X"s in the timer standby suggestion display XA5 may be three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. Further, it is not limited to “X”, and may be another alphabet or a symbol such as “◯”, “□”, “Δ”, “?”, “!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed as "1 more timer", which indicates that the number of times of the timer is suggested as compared with the time of the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by 1, indicating that the timer display will appear once more. FIG. 60(D) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Also, during the first timer display effect, an effect effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves to the deployed position is performed. In this accessory effect, the second movable accessory 15 has at least a part of the timer display area XA1 (timer number suggestion display XA2 and timer display XA3) and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R viewed from the player. cover.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60(F), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "one more timer". It is suggested that the timer display appears one more time after the second timer number suggestion display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 60(F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be incremented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "Gekiatsu" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character that suggests the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A new character that indicates the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned timer display count suggesting effects A to D, other effects (such as other timer display count suggesting effects) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer display count suggestive effect.
[Effect 1]
In the timer display number suggesting effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed and the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are being changed. After that, the timer display XA3 is performed. According to this configuration, since the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, the player can look forward to the production in which scene the timer display appears. Since the timer display XA3 is performed after the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed, when the timer display XA3 is displayed, expectations for future development can be given while keeping in mind the remaining number of timer displays. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned timer display times suggestive effects A to D, the timer display XA3 is displayed in the variable display area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display XA3 can be focused on rather than the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the player can be expected to have future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the timer display number suggesting effects A to D, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed in the variable display area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. With this configuration, the timer count suggestion display XA2 can be focused on rather than the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the player can be expected to develop in the future. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned timer display number suggesting effects A to D, the number of times the timer display suggested by the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed in the first timer number suggesting display effect is 2 or more. According to this configuration, if the timer number suggestion display XA2 appears, the timer display is performed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to increase the attention of the player with respect to the timer number suggestion display XA2. .. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the timer display number suggesting effects A to D, after the first timer number suggesting displaying effect, the first timer display suggesting effect is performed, and thereafter, the second timer number suggesting displaying effect is performed and the second timer number suggesting effect is displayed. In the effect, it is suggested that the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed one time less than the timer number suggestion display XA2 in the first timer number suggestion display effect. That is, in the second timer number suggestion display effect, "the number of times the timer display is performed in the future" represented by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is "1", and in the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 represents. "Number of times the timer is displayed in the future" is "2". According to this configuration, each time the timer display is performed, "the number of times the timer display is performed in the future" represented by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is decremented by 1. Therefore, "the future timer display is performed in the timer number suggestion display XA2. It is possible to accurately indicate the “number of times that the game is performed”. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above timer display number suggesting effects B to D, in the first timer display effect, the timer number indicating display XA2 is continuously displayed while the timer display XA3 is being displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display XA3 and the timer number suggestion display XA2 are displayed. Therefore, while enjoying the timer effect of the timer display XA3, the timer number suggestion display XA2 gives great expectation for the appearance of the next timer effect. Can be granted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the timer display count suggestive effect.
[Modification 1]
In the timer display times suggestive effect of the gaming machine of the above embodiment,
[Modification 1]
In the timer display number suggesting display effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number of times the timer number suggesting display XA2 suggests is “2” in the first timer number suggesting display effect. The number of times suggested by the timer number suggestion display XA2 may be set to 3 or more or 1 without being limited thereto. In the timer display count effect, the timer display is performed for the number of times indicated by the timer count indication XA2. For example, if the number of times indicated by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is “3”, then the timer display is executed three times.

[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned timer display count suggestion display effect D, the second movable accessory 15 is made to move so as to cover the timer display area XA1 in the timer display effect, but also in the timer standby effect, the timer display in the timer standby state. You may move so that the area|region XA1 may be covered.

[Modification 3]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed in the timer display area XA1, and the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed adjacent to each other, The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 may be displayed separately.

[Modification 4]
In the above-mentioned timer display count suggestion display effects A to D, when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), the chance-up effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined chance-up effect is used instead. May be performed. Examples of the predetermined effects include pseudo effect, look-ahead effect, zone effect, reach effect, super reach effect, mini game effect, mission effect, and the like.

[Modification 5]
In the above-mentioned timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 were displayed on the variable region of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, but the invention is not limited to this, and the timer number suggestion display. The XA2 and/or the timer display XA3 may be displayed in an area different from the variable area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of changing the decorative design,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a timer display,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a timer count suggesting display that suggests that the timer display is performed a predetermined number of times,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and after the third display effect is performed. , The second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect XA-1 or Aspect XA-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-3,
The predetermined number of times the timer display is performed in the third display effect is 2 or more,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed again, and in the third display effect. The timer number suggestion display indicates that the timer display is performed one time less than the predetermined number of times,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-5,
In the combination effect, the timer count suggestion display in the third display effect is continuously displayed during the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The timer count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. This timer count effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), for example, special It is executed at the time of starting the variable display of the symbol, at the time of starting the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, the timer count effect is a display for counting a timer value using a timer image, and a movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, or a specific image is predetermined. It is an effect that suggests that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time by changing to the mode.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A.
In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the reach effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol symbol 8L is on the left symbol symbol display area, the middle symbol symbol 8C is on the middle symbol symbol display area, The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 61(A), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach design arrangement, and the decorative design 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol array, and the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this reach effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are formed at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The state where the first movable accessory 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown (see FIG. 1 ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. 61(A). In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display image of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked) and can be seen from the broken area, which is behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 61(B), the characters "50 seconds left" and the numeral indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numeral enlarged from the character. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 61(A) are deleted, and on the display screen 7a, the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed and a battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 61(A). As with the reach production, each waits at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61C, the count suggestion upper right auditor effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper right accessory effect, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since the timer image TM displayed 50 seconds as the timer initial value in the timer display effect shown in FIG. It shows the state when it reaches 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a of the first movable auditors 14 located at the home position is movable, and the first advance position on the display screen 7a is reached. Advance to. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a moves when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61(B) is counted down by 2 seconds. The upper right first movable accessory 14a immediately retracts to the home position after advancing to the first advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion upper right accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61D, the count suggestion lower right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower right accessory effect, in the count suggestion upper right effect effect shown in FIG. 61C, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 46. It shows the state in seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and the second advance on the display screen 7a is performed. Advance to the position. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b moves when the timer value of the count suggestive upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61C is counted down by 2 seconds. Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b is larger than the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable accessory 14a shown in FIG. 61(C). That is, the distance from the home position to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first advance position. The lower right first movable accessory 14b immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the count suggestion lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower left accessory production, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 46 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower right accessory production shown in FIG. 61(D), and the timer value was 44. It shows the state in seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and the third advance position on the display screen 7a is reached. Advance to. That is, the lower left first movable accessory 14c moves when the timer value of the count suggestive lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61D is counted down by 2 seconds. Here, the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b shown in FIG. 61(D). That is, the distance from the home position to the third advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first and second advance positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM in the state of being located at the third advance position. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 visually changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. The lower left first movable accessory 14c immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the third advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the count suggestion upper left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper left accessory production, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 44 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 61(E), and the timer value was 42 seconds. Shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d is movable and the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Advance to. In other words, the upper left first movable accessory 14d moves when the timer value of the count suggestive lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 61(E) is counted down by 2 seconds. Here, the fluctuation range of the upper left first movable accessory 14d is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 61(E). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first, second, and third advance positions. The upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM in the state of being located at the fourth advance position. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 visually changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. The upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the count suggestive all-effects effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion all-effects effect, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 42 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion upper left effect effect shown in FIG. 61(F), and the timer value was 40 seconds. Shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, all of the first movable accessory members 14 located in the home position move and advance to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the count suggesting upper left accessory effects shown in FIG. 61(F). Moves when the timer value is counted down for 2 seconds. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61(B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM, all the first movable accessory 14 move. .. It should be noted that all of the first movable accessory 14 are immediately withdrawn to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion all-effects effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the timer count effect A shown in FIG. 61, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable accessory 14 as a movable body. Is movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, every time 2 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first The movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move sequentially (clockwise), which suggests that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable accessory 14 can be advanced in four stages from the first advance position to the fourth advance position, and the upper right first movable accessory 14a is at the first advance position and the lower right first. The first movable accessory 14b is in the second advanced position, the lower left first movable accessory 14c is in the third advanced position, the upper left first movable accessory 14d is in the fourth advanced position, and the range of variation on the display screen 7a is different. It has become fluctuating. As a result, both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds). Can be suggested by. Further, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, all of the first movable accessory 14 are movable, and the first movable accessory 14 moves to the fourth position on the display screen 7a. It is designed to advance to the position. As a result, the fact that the predetermined time (10 seconds) is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value is also suggested by both the number of movable accessory parts and the fluctuation range thereof. Is possible.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B.
In the timer count effect B, first, although not shown, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 61(A). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol symbol 8L is on the left symbol symbol display area, the middle symbol symbol 8C is on the middle symbol symbol display area, The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In the reach effect, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach design array, and the decorative design 8C is in a changing (scrolling) state. In this reach effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are formed at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 is located at the home position (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display image of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked) and can be seen from the broken area, which is behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 62(A), the characters "50 seconds left" and the numeral indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numeral enlarged from the character. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect are deleted, and on the display screen 7a, an image in which the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are battled is displayed. Is executed. Note that in this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are respectively home positions as in the reach effect. Standing by (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as the timer initial value was displayed in the timer image TM in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62(A), and the timer value Indicates that the time has reached 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, among the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, the first upper movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14a diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a. The one movable accessory 14c moves and advances to the first advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move as a pair when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. The upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c immediately retreat to the home position after advancing to the first advance position. Further, in this count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a count suggestion lower right upper left effect production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower right upper left effect production, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count suggestion upper right lower left effect production shown in FIG. Indicates that the time has reached 46 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, among the first movable auditors 14 located in the home position, the lower right first movable auditors 14b and the upper left are diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14d moves and advances to the second advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, when the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are counted down from the timer value of the count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. To do. Here, the variation width of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d is greater than the variation width of the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 62(B). Is also getting bigger. That is, the distance from the home position to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first advance position. In addition, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately retreat to the home position after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right upper left effect production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the count suggestive all-effect production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion all effect production, in the count suggestion lower right upper left effect production shown in FIG. 62C, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was The state is 44 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, all of the first movable accessory members 14 located in the home position are movable and advance to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the count suggestion lower right upper left accessory shown in FIG. 62(C). It moves when the timer value of the performance is counted down for 2 seconds. Here, the variation range of the first movable accessory 14 is larger than the variation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d shown in FIG. 62(C). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first and second advance positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly cover a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM in the state of being located at the fourth advance position. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 visually changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. It should be noted that all of the first movable accessory 14 are immediately withdrawn to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion all-effects effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the jump count suggestive all-effect production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this skip count all effect product effect, the timer value displayed in the timer image TM in the count all effect product effect shown in FIG. 62D is changed from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. .. That is, the timer value suddenly changes from 44 seconds to 34 seconds even though 10 seconds have not actually passed from the count suggestive all-effects production shown in FIG. 62D (actually, about 2 seconds have passed). It shows the flying condition. Then, when the timer value reaches 34 seconds, all of the first movable accessory members 14 located in the home position are movable and fluctuate in a predetermined manner on the display screen 7a. The change in the predetermined mode is performed as follows. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately advance from the home position to the first advance position. The operation of moving backward from the first advance position to the home position is repeated at a high speed for a predetermined number of times. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are home as shown by arrows A, B, C, and D. It moves back and forth between the position and the first advance position, and fluctuates in small steps for a predetermined time. Here, in FIG. 62(E), the first advance position is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. It should be noted that all of the first movable accessory 14 are arranged in the home position when the change in the predetermined mode ends. Further, in this flying count suggestion all-effects effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this long count suggestion upper right lower left effect production, 14 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 34 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the jump count suggestion all effect production shown in FIG. In 20 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c, which are diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a, move. , The state where the display screen 7a has advanced to the first advance position is shown. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move in pairs to advance to the first advance position when the timer value shown in FIG. 62(F) reaches 20 seconds. Maintain its advanced state. In this long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the long count suggestion lower right upper left effect production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this long count suggestion lower right upper left effect production, in the long count suggestion upper right lower left effect production shown in FIG. 62F, 2 seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM. , The timer value is maintained for 20 seconds. Then, when 2 seconds elapse from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 62(F), the upper right first movable accessory 14a that has advanced to the first advanced position and maintained the advanced state. The lower left first movable accessory 14c retracts to the home position. At the same time, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d, which are diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a, move. , Advance to the second advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs to reach the second advance position when 2 seconds elapse after 20 seconds are displayed in the timer image TM. Advance and maintain the advance status. In addition, in this long count suggestion lower right upper left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the long count suggestive all-effect production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this long count suggestion all effect production, 4 seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the long count suggestion upper right lower left effect production shown in FIG. 62(F) (see FIG. 62(G)). It shows a state in which the timer value is maintained at 20 seconds despite the fact that 2 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion lower right upper left effect production was performed. Then, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 62(F), the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are maintained second. Advance from the advance position to the fourth advance position. At the same time, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c located at the home position advance to the fourth advance position. That is, when 4 seconds elapse from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 62(F), the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move again as a pair. , From the second advance position to the fourth advance position and maintain the advance state, while the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c again move in pairs to form the home. Advance from the position to the 4th advance position and maintain that advance state. As a result, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable auditors 14, that is, the upper right first movable auditors 14a, the lower right first movable auditors 14b, the lower left first movable auditors 14c, and the upper left first movable auditors 14a. The object 14d has advanced to the fourth advance position and remains in the advanced state. In addition, in this long count suggestion all character product production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, 2 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion all character effects shown in FIG. 62(H), that is, 6 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion upper left lower part effect shown in FIG. 62(F). At this time, all the first movable accessory 14 are retracted from the maintained fourth advance position to the home position, and the timer image TM displays 14 seconds as the timer value.

Thus, in the timer count effect B shown in FIG. 62, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every 2 seconds in this example, the timer value is counted), the first movable body is composed of a plurality of movable bodies. The two predetermined movable bodies of the movable accessory 14 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c, or the lower right, each time 2 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point. The first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs to indicate that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d that are paired have different fluctuation ranges on the display screen 7a. It is supposed to fluctuate. As a result, both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range can be used to indicate that a predetermined time (2 or 4 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. Is possible. Also, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the effect whose timer value is counted is shorter than the actual elapsed time, or when the timer value is counted longer than the actual elapsed time. When the above is performed, the movable body is movable in a special variation mode (FIG. 62(E), FIG. 62(F) to (H)). This makes it possible to indicate that the timer value is counted at a time different from the actual elapsed time, by moving the movable body in a special variation mode.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C.
In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the reach effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol symbol 8L is on the left symbol symbol display area, the middle symbol symbol 8C is on the middle symbol symbol display area, The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 63(A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol array, and the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this reach effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are formed at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The state where the first movable accessory 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. 63(A). In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display image of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked) and can be seen from the broken area, which is behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 63(B), the characters and numbers of “50 seconds left” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 63(A) are deleted, and on the display screen 7a, the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed and a battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 63(A). As with the reach production, each waits at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a count suggestion upper right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper right accessory effect, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as the timer initial value was displayed in the timer image TM in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63(B), and the timer value was It shows a state of 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Advance to. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a moves when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63(B) is counted down for 2 seconds, moves to the fourth advance position, and maintains the advance state. In addition, in this count suggestion upper right accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the count suggestion lower right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower right accessory effect, in the count suggestion upper right effect effect shown in FIG. 63(C), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 46. It shows the state in seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b of the first movable accessory 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b is movable when it is counted down from the timer value of the count suggestive upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. maintain. Thus, on the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b of the first movable accessory 14 have advanced to the fourth advance position and maintained the advance state. It becomes a state. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the count suggestive lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower left accessory production, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower right accessory production shown in FIG. 63(D), and the timer value was 44. It shows the state in seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c of the first movable accessory 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower left first movable accessory 14c moves when the timer value of the count suggestive lower right accessory production shown in FIG. 63(D) is counted down for 2 seconds, and moves to the fourth advance position to set the advance state. maintain. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, among the first movable accessory 14, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first movable accessory 14c advance to the fourth advance position. Then, the state of advancement is maintained. Further, the lower left first movable accessory 14c visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM in the state of being located at the fourth advance position. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 visually changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a count suggestion upper left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper left accessory production, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 44 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 63(E), and the timer value was 42 seconds. Shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d of the first movable accessory 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper left first movable accessory 14d moves when the timer value of the count suggestive lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 63(E) is counted down for 2 seconds, and moves to the fourth advance position to maintain the advance state. To do. As a result, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable auditors 14, that is, the upper right first movable auditors 14a, the lower right first movable auditors 14b, the lower left first movable auditors 14c, and the upper left first movable auditors 14a. The object 14d has advanced to the fourth advance position and remains in the advanced state. Further, the upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM in the state of being located at the fourth advance position. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 visually changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the count suggestion first and second accessory effects are executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggestion first and second character effects, in the count suggestion upper left character effect shown in FIG. 63(F), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) from 42 seconds being displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is displayed. Indicates that the time has reached 40 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the second movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1) located in the home position advances to the center advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the second movable accessory 15 is movable when the timer value of the count suggestive upper left accessory effect shown in FIG. 63(F) is counted down by 2 seconds. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63(B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) from the time when 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM, all the first movable accessory 14 are in the fourth state. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the center advance position substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the central advance position, the second movable accessory 15 has the right upper right movable first accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the left lower left first movable. It is located between the accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d, that is, it stops at a position where it does not overlap with all the first movable accessories 14, and the timer image display area TMH and a part of the battle effect are visually recognized. It is impossible to cover (the timer image TM is not covered). In the count suggestion first and second character effects, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 immediately retracts to the home position after advancing to the central advance position. At the same time, all the first movable accessory 14 that has advanced to the fourth advance position retracts to the home position. Further, in this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the timer count effect C shown in FIG. 63, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable role of a different type as a movable body is obtained. The object 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, every time 2 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first The movable accessory 14c, the upper left first movable accessory 14d, and the second movable accessory 15 are sequentially moved to indicate that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable accessory 14 is sequentially advanced to a predetermined advance position (fourth advance position), and then the advanced state is maintained until the second movable accessory 15 moves. As a result, both the movable accessory and its advanced state are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds). Can be suggested by. Further, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, all the first movable accessory 14 advance to the predetermined advance position (the fourth advance position). In this state, the second movable accessory 15 moves to advance to a predetermined advance position (central advance position). As a result, the fact that the timer value displayed when the timer is displayed or a predetermined time (10 seconds) that is a good break from the timer value that is the starting point is counted also indicates the type of the movable movable accessory and its advance state. Both can be suggested.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D.
In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In FIG. 64A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are formed at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 thus set is located at the home position (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a timer/character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer/character display effect, the character image CA1 as the specific image is displayed in the character image display area CAH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64(A). In the character image display area CAH, a part of the effect screen (the display screen of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked) and can be seen from the broken area, which is behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. It is formed on the side (rear side). A timer image TM is displayed on the lower right side in front of the character image display area CAH. The timer image TM is displayed across the character image display area CAH and the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the character image display area CAH (character image CA1). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 64(B), the characters "50 seconds left" and the numeral indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numeral enlarged from the character. Further, in this timer character display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64(A) are deleted, and on the display screen 7a, the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. An image of a battle between and is displayed, and a battle effect is executed. In this timer/character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 64(A). Similar to the reach production shown, they are waiting at their home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64C, the character fade-out effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character fade-out effect is the timer/character display effect shown in FIG. 64(B). Immediately after the timer image TM displays 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer, the character image CA1 fades out over time (in the figure, , The character image CA1 is shown by a wavy line). In this character fade-out effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 64(B). Similar to the timer/character display effect, they are waiting at the home position (origin). In the character fade-out effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the count suggestive character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggesting character erasing accessory effect is the timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64(B), and 1 second has elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM. This shows a state in which the timer value has reached 49 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by 1 second when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, the character image CA1 becomes difficult to be seen every one second, and the timer image TM is switched at the timing when it becomes difficult to see the character image CA1. Further, since the character image CA1 fades out from the visible display mode to the difficult-to-view display mode within 1 second, the visual confirmation state of the character image CA1 during this time suggests a number of seconds equal to or less than 1 second of the timer value. ing. Further, in the count suggestive character erasing accessory production, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, all of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position are movable and the second advance on the display screen 7a is performed. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are timer/character display effect timers shown in FIG. 64B. It moves when the value is counted down for 1 second. It should be noted that all of the first movable accessory 14 immediately retreat to the home position after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestive character erasing character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a timer/multi-character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The timer/multi-character display effect is the count suggestive character erasing accessory shown in FIG. 64(D), and is an effect performed immediately after the character image CA1 is erased. In this timer/multi-character display effect, character images CA1 and CA2 as specific images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. That is, a plurality of character images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. In this timer/multi-character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are respectively home positions (origins). ), the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), the count suggestive character decrease effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggestion character decrease effect is the count suggestion character erasing accessory effect shown in FIG. 64(D), and 1 second has elapsed (countdown) since 49 seconds was displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 48 seconds. Shows the state of becoming. Although not shown, only 1 character image CA2 of the character images CA1 and CA2 fades out over time while 1 second elapses after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the character image CA2 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by 1 second at the timing when the character image CA2 disappears. In this count suggestion character reduction effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are respectively home positions (origin). And the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the count suggestive character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggestion character erasing accessory production is the count suggestion character decrease production shown in FIG. 64(F), and 1 second has elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds was displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 47 seconds. Shows the state of becoming. Although illustration is omitted, the character image CA1 fades out with the lapse of time while 1 second elapses after 48 seconds is displayed on the timer image TM. Then, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by 1 second when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, when 2 seconds elapse after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, both the character images CA1 and CA2 are completely erased, and the count of the timer value is 2 when both the character images CA1 and CA2 are invisible. Seconds are subtracted. That is, the count of the timer value is subtracted by the number of seconds of the number of deleted character images (for example, if three character images are deleted, the count of the timer value is decreased by 3 seconds). Further, in the count suggestive character erasing accessory production, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, all of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position are movable, and the fourth advance on the display screen 7a is achieved. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are timers for the count suggestive character reduction effect shown in FIG. 64(F). It moves when the value is counted down for 1 second. It should be noted that all of the first movable accessory 14 are immediately withdrawn to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestive character erasing character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after all the first movable accessory members 14 shown in FIG. 64(G) have returned to their home positions, the displayed timer image TM, character image display area CAH, and battle effect are displayed on the display screen 7a. The screen is switched, and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64(A) is displayed, showing that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, this reach effect is the timer/multi-character display effect shown in FIG. 64(E) or the count suggestive character erasing accessory effect shown in FIG. 64(G), in which a plurality of character images are displayed, This is performed because all the first movable accessory members 14 have advanced to the fourth advance position, that is, that a plurality of character images are displayed and the first movable accessory object 14 has advanced to the fourth advance position. , It is a chance up production.

As described above, in the timer count effect D shown in FIG. 64, the character image as the specific image has the predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 1 second). It has been changed to. That is, for example, the display mode of the character image is changed from the display mode in which the character image is recognizable to the display mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the character image from the timer value when the timer is displayed or one second has elapsed from the timer value which is the starting point. .. Moreover, when the character image is changed to a display mode that is difficult to visually recognize, all the first movable accessory objects 14 are advanced to a predetermined advance position. Thus, the fact that the predetermined time (1 second) is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point means that the display mode of the character image as the specific image is changed and the predetermined character object is displayed. It is possible to suggest by both of the fact that it is movable. Further, an effect of displaying a plurality of character images and changing the advance position of the first movable accessory 14 is performed. With this, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the variation of the decorative design depending on the number of displayed character images and the position where the movable accessory moves.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of timer count production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined manner every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. In addition, the movable body is formed of a highly transparent member, and is configured so that the timer value can be visually recognized regardless of how the movement is controlled. According to this configuration, the player can count the predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value by simply looking at the movable body without paying attention to the timer value. You will understand. As a result, the player has a timer value in which it is easy to give an advantageous privilege, for example, in an effect in which the advantageous privilege is easily given when the count reaches a specific timer value (the jackpot expectation level is increased). Can be easily understood. Further, by moving the movable body in various modes, it is possible to perform not only a timer value but also an effect that suggests an advantageous privilege (a big hit expectation). For example, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies is moved in a predetermined manner, or at least two or more movable bodies of the plurality of movable bodies are moved in a predetermined manner. It is also possible to do. As a result, the player can pay attention to which movable body of the plurality of movable bodies has moved or how many of the plurality of movable bodies have moved, with a sense of expectation. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of movable bodies move sequentially (clockwise) every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, and furthermore, each of the movable bodies moves. The fluctuation range from the home position at that time is different. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate that the timer has been counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point, by both the movable movable body and its fluctuation range. Has become. Further, every time a specific number of seconds is counted, all the movable bodies move so as to advance to the advance position having the largest fluctuation range. As a result, the fact that a specific number of seconds (for example, the number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good interval) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value is Both the number and the fluctuation range can be used to make an indication. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, one pair of movable bodies moves, Moreover, the plurality of pairs of movable bodies are configured such that the range of variation from the home position when moving is different for each pair. According to this configuration, it is suggested by both the movable paired movable body and its fluctuation range that the timer has been counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point. It will be possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the effect in which the timer value is counted in a time shorter than the actual elapsed time is performed, or When the production in which the timer value is counted for a time longer than the elapsed time is performed, the movable body is configured to move in a special variation mode. According to this configuration, when the advantageous effect is given (a big hit expectation degree) in such a special effect in the timer count effect, the movable body is changed in a special change mode different from the normal change mode. Since it is movable, this allows the player to easily understand that the suggestion of giving the advantageous privilege has been made, only by observing that the movable body has changed in a special manner. That is, the player pays close attention to whether or not the movable body moves in a special variation mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the plurality of movable bodies move sequentially (clockwise) every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, and each of the plurality of movable bodies, After sequentially advancing to a predetermined advancing position, the advancing state is maintained until all the movable bodies move. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate that the predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point, by both the movable movable body and the advanced state thereof. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, movable bodies of different types are configured to move simultaneously every time a specific number of seconds is counted. According to this configuration, it is movable that a specific number of seconds (for example, a number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good interval) is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point. It becomes possible to suggest by the type of the movable body. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the character image as the specific image is changed to a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. More specifically, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the display mode in which the character image as the specific image is visible is changed to the display mode in which it is difficult to view. According to this configuration, the fact that a predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value is suggested by changing the display mode of the character image as the specific image. Will be possible. Further, when the character image is changed to a display mode that is difficult to visually recognize, the movable body advances to a predetermined advance position. As a result, the fact that a predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value is suggested by both the change in the display mode of the character image as the specific image and the movement of the movable body. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the timer count effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the movable body is arranged to be visible to the player in the state of being located in the home position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the movable body may be arranged invisible to the player in the state of being located in the home position. Alternatively, only a specific movable accessory of the plurality of movable bodies may be arranged so as to be visible to the player. According to this structure, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the movable body suddenly appears from a position invisible to the player, so that the player can be impressed with the operation of the movable body. The interest of can be improved. Further, the movable bodies are provided at the four corners of the display screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies may be provided symmetrically in the vertical and horizontal directions other than the four corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, in the timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect are deleted, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, in the timer display effect, the reach pattern of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the rear side of the movable body (the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the upper left first movable accessory 14d) located at the home position. You may do so. In this case, the entire reach symbol may be displayed on the rear side of the movable body. According to this structure, since the movable body has high transparency, it is possible to perform an effect in which the movable body and the reach pattern are related to each other, and as a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, the effect displayed instead of the decorative pattern in the timer display effect may not be the battle effect, and may be, for example, a step-up effect or a story effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the timer image composed of characters and numbers is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed only with numbers. The timer image may be displayed in various fonts and colors, and the fonts and colors may be used to indicate the degree of expectation of privilege. Further, although the timer image is displayed in the countdown system in which the timer value counts down, it may be displayed in the countup system in which the timer value counts up.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is made movable every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds, but the movable body has a timer value other than 2 seconds. It may be movable every time it is counted. Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the character image as the specific image is erased every time the timer value is counted for one second when one is displayed, and the timer value is counted for two seconds when two are displayed. The character image is erased each time it is deleted, but the time for deleting the character image can be set arbitrarily.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when a plurality (two) of character images as the specific image are displayed, the character image is set to 1 every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Although they are erased one by one, a plurality (two) may be erased collectively every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). When the character images are deleted one by one, the displayed character images may be associated with the jackpot expectation degree, and the jackpot expectation degree may be suggested by the order in which the character images are erased. For example, when a character image with a low jackpot expectation disappears before a character image with a high jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when it disappears later.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer image is displayed in the timer image display area as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the display mode of the timer image shown in FIG. 64, the timer image may be displayed so as to extend over the timer image display area and the effect screen being displayed so as to cover a part of the timer image display area. Good.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
A movable body,
Control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined manner,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The display means displays a predetermined timer image as one of the plurality of display effects, and performs an effect including a display for counting a timer value using the timer image,
The control means may control the movable body to move in a predetermined manner every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-2]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
Each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner,
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1.
[Aspect A3-3]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
Every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, at least two or more movable bodies of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner.
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2.
[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects.
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including displaying a predetermined timer image and displaying the timer value using the timer image,
The second effect is an effect of changing the specific image into a predetermined mode,
The display means may change the specific image to a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-5]
The display means may change from a display mode in which the specific image is visible to a display mode in which it is difficult to view each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-4, which is characterized in that.

The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), for example, the special symbol. Is started at the start of the variable display, at the start of the decorative design fluctuation effect, during the decorative pattern fluctuation effect, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, this timer effect is an effect including a display for counting a timer value using a timer image and a display for stopping or exhausting the timer value at a predetermined value, and the timer value is stopped or exhausted at a predetermined value. When the display effect is performed, the specific image is simultaneously displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode.

[Timer production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the timer effect executability effect is executed. This timer effect execution feasibility effect, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left symbol symbol 8L in the symbol symbol display area on the left, the symbol symbol A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 65(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a is executed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the teammate character CRA is defeated. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the character "Victory!" indicating that the teammate character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 65(A) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "win!", it is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 65(A). In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (variable display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked), and the display screen 7a can be seen from the broken area. It is formed on the back side (rear side) of the inside effect screen. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65(C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65C is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image relating to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation (the expectation degree of the jackpot type is determined by the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is also suggested. In FIG. 65(E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position where the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 65(E), and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous granting to the player, and the jackpot expectation (including the expectation of the jackpot type) of the variation depending on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ) Has been suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the character MLG is composed of the same characters as the character MKE, and is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MKE is displayed by the character MKE. Readably covered. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantial center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and at the same time, the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are overlapped with each other, and a part of them is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. Since the character MLG is displayed with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen for the specific image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 65(F) is switched. That is, the characters MLG and the characters MKE shown in FIG. 65(F) are erased, and the reach effect in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach design arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement.

[Timer production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the timer effect executability effect is executed. This timer effect execution feasibility effect, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left symbol symbol 8L in the symbol symbol display area on the left, the symbol symbol A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In FIG. 66(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a is executed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the teammate character CRA is defeated. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the character "Victory!" indicating that the teammate character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 66(A) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "win!", it is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 66(A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66(C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), the timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66C is counted down to 5 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the timer value is stopped midway. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 5 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image relating to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation (the expectation degree of the jackpot type is determined by the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is also suggested. In FIG. 66(E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position where the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 66(E), and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous granting to the player, and the jackpot expectation (including the expectation of the jackpot type) of the variation depending on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ) Has been suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the character MLG is composed of the same characters as the character MKE, and is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MKE is displayed by the character MKE. Readably covered. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantial center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and at the same time, the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are overlapped with each other, and a part of them is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. Since the character MLG is displayed with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 66(F), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. It That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes diagonally (downward to the right) from the display mode that was horizontally displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, and is displayed as a whole on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLG as a whole, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. You can grasp and have great expectations for further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 66(G) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 66(G) is erased, and the reach effect in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R stop in the reach design arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement.

[Timer production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol pattern area and the middle symbol symbol display area. The middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the right design display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 67(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67(A), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67A is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image relating to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation (the expectation degree of the jackpot type is determined by the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is also suggested. In FIG. 67C, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted, and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. These characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the variation depending on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3). (The expectation of the jackpot type is also included) is suggested (the jackpot expectation: character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from the characters MKE (the character MSG1 “hot heat”, the character MSG2 “holding change”, and the character MSG3 “NEXT”). And is displayed at the rear side of the character MKE with substantially the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and if they overlap with the character MKE during the movement, a part or all of them are converted to the character MKE through the rear side of the character MKE. It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67(C), and instead of the deleted characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3, the specific image Is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. This character MLG is the same character as the character MKE, is displayed larger than the character MKE on the rear side of the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is readablely covered by the character MKE. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantial center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and at the same time, the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are overlapped with each other, and a part of them is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. That is, in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67(C)), there is no same character (“chance”) as the character MKE in the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed as the specific image, and the subsequent specific image superimposing effect ( In FIG. 67(D), instead of the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3, the character MLG as a specific image of the same character as the character MKE is displayed. In this way, when the character MLG that is the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation degree of the variation becomes the highest (jacket expectation degree: character MLG>character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 67D, the character MKE is deleted and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. It That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes diagonally (downward to the right) from the display mode that was horizontally displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, and is displayed as a whole on the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLG as a whole, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. You can grasp and have great expectations for further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the probability variation reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 67(E) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 67(E) is erased, and the probability variation reach effect in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach pattern array of the probability variation jackpot is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific image superimposition effect, it is assumed that “NEXT” is displayed as the character MLG as shown in FIG. 67(G) instead of FIG. 67(D). That is, in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(G), the characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67(C), and the deleted characters MSG1, MSG2. , MSG3, the character MLG is displayed as a specific image in the effect image display area EGH. This character MLG is not the same character as the character MKE (“chance”), but is displayed as the character MSG3 (“NEXT”) enlarged (for example, 3 to 5 times). That is, in this specific image superimposition effect, MSG3 is selected from the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67(C)), and the rear side of the timer image display area TMH is used as the character MLG. In the substantial center of the effect image display area EGH located at, the character MKE is displayed larger than the character MKE. In this way, when the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the variation is greater than when the same character MLG is displayed. The degree of expectation of jackpot is low (the degree of expectation of jackpot: character MLG>character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). By displaying the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image single effect shown in FIG. 67(E) is performed as an effect that makes the player have expectations. However, when the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image single effect is omitted and the normal reach effect shown in FIG. 67(H) is executed. In this normal reach effect, the screen for the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(G) is switched, and the normal reach effect in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach pattern arrangement of the normal jackpot on the display screen 7a. Executed. In this example, "8↓8" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the number of changes in the special symbol is performed 100 times. The gaming state is a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state), and after that, it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state).

[Timer production D]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol pattern area and the middle symbol symbol display area. The middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the right design display area. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66(C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value. When the timer image TM is displayed, a battle effect is performed in the center of the display screen 7a in place of the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Although not shown, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 68(A) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the battle effect is continued. In this battle effect, an image in which the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle each other is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image relating to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation (the expectation degree of the jackpot type is determined by the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is also suggested. In FIG. 68C, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted, and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. These characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the variation depending on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3). (The expectation of the jackpot type is also included) is suggested (the jackpot expectation: character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from the characters MKE (the character MSG1 "competition", the character MSG2 "hold change", and the character MSG3 "NEXT"). In addition to being configured, the character MKE is displayed behind the character MKE in substantially the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and if they overlap with the character MKE during the movement, a part or all of them are converted to the character MKE through the rear side of the character MKE. It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG2 and MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 68(C), and the character MSG1 (“participation in battle”) is enlarged and displayed in the substantial center of the display screen 7a. It That is, the display mode of the character MSG1 changes to the character MLG as the specific image and is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. Further, the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is enlarged and displayed while changing from "chance" to "participation". That is, the character MKE as the first display mode of the specific image and the character MLG as the second display mode of the specific image are displayed with the same character. The character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE on the rear side of the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is readablely covered by the character MKE. That is, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE in substantially the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 2). ˜3 times), the timer image display area TMH and the effect image display area EGH are overlapped with each other, and a part of them is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. In this way, when the character MLG that is the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation degree of the variation becomes the highest (jacket expectation degree: character MLG>character MSG2>character MSG3). The character MKE that is the same as the character MKE is displayed, and the character MKE that is initially displayed is changed and enlarged so that the character MKE is displayed in the same character as the character MLG. With the development of, we can have more expectations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a specific image character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image character effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 68D, the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG is changed from the display mode that was horizontally displayed in the specific image superimposition effect to the oblique mode (downward to the right), and is displayed entirely on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the name CNA (“OARO”) of the character CRC is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This character CRC is displayed based on the fact that “participation in battle” is displayed as the character MLG. A character who battles. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of character CRC displayed in this specific image character effect, and the type of character CRC suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the change (including the expectation degree of the jackpot type). In addition, "OARO" as the character CRC displayed here is a character with a relatively high jackpot expectation. Since the character MLG is entirely displayed, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as the specific image related to the advantageous privilege grant to the player, and more accurately the current game state. With the appearance of the character CRC “OARO” that can be grasped and has a relatively high jackpot expectation, great expectations can be placed on further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the probability variation reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(E) is switched. That is, the character MLG, the character CRC, and the name CNA shown in FIG. 68(E) are erased, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped on the display screen 7a in the reach pattern arrangement of the probability jackpot. To be done. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific image character effect, it is assumed that the name CNA (“ZERO”) is displayed as the character CRC as shown in FIG. 68(G) instead of FIG. 68(E). “ZERO” as the character CRC is a character with a relatively low jackpot expectation, and has a lower jackpot expectation than the above “OARO”. That is, the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(G) is changed from the display state of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. The character "ZERO" having a relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed. In this way, by displaying the character CRC with a relatively low jackpot expectation in the specific image character effect, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal reach effect, the screen for the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(G) is switched, and on the display screen 7a, the normal reach effect in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are usually stopped in the reach pattern arrangement of the jackpot. Executed. In this example, "8↓8" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the number of changes in the special symbol is performed 100 times. The gaming state is a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state), and after that, it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state).

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first effect is to display a predetermined timer image, display a timer value using the timer image, and display the timer value. The second effect is an effect including a display for stopping or digesting at a predetermined value, and the second effect is an effect including a display of a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the timer value is a predetermined value in the first effect. When a display effect that is stopped or consumed is performed, an effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode is performed as the second effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value is stopped or exhausted at a predetermined value, a specific image relating to the advantageous privilege grant to the player is displayed, so that the player increases the timer value that changes moment by moment. You can enjoy the game while gazing with high expectations. Further, since the specific image is displayed simultaneously in the first display mode and the second display mode, by changing the combination of these display modes variously, the degree of expectation of the player for the subsequent development of the game is changed. Can be made. This can make the player happy and unhappy. Further, it is possible to associate the timer value to be stopped with the specific image and change the expectation of the player according to the value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image. The second display mode is a display mode in which a part displayed on the rear side of the timer image is covered by the specific image of the first display mode. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to guess the specific image displayed in the second display mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image is a predetermined character, and the same character is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image. The characters in the second display mode, which are display modes and are partially covered by the characters in the first display mode, are readable display modes. With this configuration, although the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode are partially covered, the display mode is the same as the characters displayed in the first display mode and can be read. Therefore, the player can accurately guess the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode and enjoy the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the character of the first display mode is deleted, the character of the second display mode is changed and the entire display is performed. It is configured. According to this configuration, the characters of the second display mode, which are partially covered, are displayed entirely, so that the player verifies whether or not the characters of the second display mode estimated by the player were correct. You can Furthermore, since the display mode of the characters in the second display mode changes when the characters are entirely displayed, it is possible to change the expectation of the player by changing the display mode in various ways. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the entire display of the second display mode is erased, the decorative pattern is displayed in the reach state. According to this configuration, when the characters in the second display mode are all displayed, the reach always occurs, so that the player is overjoyed whether or not the characters in the second display mode are all displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to associate the character of the second display mode with the jackpot expectation and change the jackpot expectation depending on the characters of the second display mode that are entirely displayed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image displayed in place of the timer value in the timer image display area displays predetermined characters. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be an image of a symbol, a mark, a design, a character, or an object or article having a specific shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the timer display effect is displayed by the countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the timer display effect, the timer value may change irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed in a count-up system in which the timer value counts up. Further, in the timer display effect, 10 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer, but this is not limited to 10 seconds and is arbitrary. Furthermore, in the timer stop effect shown in FIG. 66, the timer image change effect is executed when the timer value is stopped at 5 seconds, but this is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the specific image single effect (FIGS. 65 and 66) or the specific image character effect (FIG. 68) is executed from the specific image superimposing effect, The character as the specific image is displayed in an oblique manner (downward to the right) from the horizontally displayed display manner so that the entire display is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display form may be changed to an arc shape, a vertical shape, a zigzag shape, etc. instead of the oblique shape so that the entire display is performed. Then, in this case, the color may be changed. Further, a plurality of display modes may be changeable, and the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on which type of display mode is changed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the timer image change effect, the three characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed as specific images in the effect image display area. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of these specific images may be other than three, and may be at least two or more. Further, these specific images may be other than characters, and may be images of symbols, marks, pictures, characters, or objects or articles having a specific shape. Furthermore, the same image (for example, “chance”) as the specific image displayed in the timer image display area may be displayed in these specific images.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, one character participates in the specific image character effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image character effect, a plurality of characters may participate in the battle. In addition, the participating characters battle with the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, but on the contrary, the player-side ally character CRA may battle with the player-side ally character CRA. May be. In this case, it is possible to provide a plurality of character colors of the character "LG" of "competition" and determine whether the participating character belongs to the friend character CRA or the enemy character CRB according to the character color.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects.
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect that includes a display for displaying a predetermined timer image, a display for counting a timer value using the timer image, and a display for stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value,
The second effect is an effect including the display of a specific image related to giving a beneficial benefit to the player,
When the display effect in which the timer value is stopped or exhausted at a predetermined value is performed in the first effect, the display means sets the specific image as the second effect in a first display mode and a second display mode. To display at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A4-2]
The first display mode of the specific image is a display mode displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image,
The second display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which a part displayed on the rear side of the timer image is covered by the specific image of the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1.
[Aspect A4-3]
The specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image are display modes in which the same character is displayed,
The characters of the second display mode, which are partially covered by the characters of the first display mode, are readable display modes,
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect A4-4]
When the character of the first display mode is deleted, the character of the second display mode is changed and the entire display is performed.
The game machine according to A4-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect A4-5]
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative patterns,
When the entire display of the second display mode is erased, the decorative design display means displays the decorative design in a reach state,
The gaming machine according to A4-4, characterized in that.

Image transparent display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. This image transparent display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image transparent display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Image transparent display effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect A. As shown in FIG. 69(A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transparent display effect A, a specific image (going image) IZ of "SMILE goes!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the change effect. This image becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69B, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of mutually different positions of the light guide plate 17 while the image IZ is being displayed. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the slight image IZ of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes visually overlapped. A superimposing effect is made possible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(C) to 69(E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 69(D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has been completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of being. The image IZ is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. The displayed composite effect is executed. At this time, the moving image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the display screen 7a, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Therefore, the character image MJ, the moving image IZ, Two or three of the smile images SL are sometimes overlapping and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(F) and 69(G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect of repeatedly switching between the state in which each of the character images MJ of "S", "Ma", "I", and "Ru" is randomly visible and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. Further, some of the images IZ on the display screen 7a may be displayed on the display screen 7a in a plurality of cases, or may be displayed in a single picture, and may be moved or stopped. As a result, two or three of the character image MJ, the image IZ, and the smile image SL are sometimes overlapped and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) to 69(J), the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are randomly switched between the visible state and the difficult-to-view state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (First aspect).

[Image transparent display effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect B. As shown in FIG. 70(A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transparent display effect B, the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the variable display is being executed. The timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70C, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(C) to 70(E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 70D, when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has been completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of being. A timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, a character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and a smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position on the light guide plate 17. The composite effect is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL can be visually recognized when two or three of them are sometimes overlapped.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(F) and 70(G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect of repeatedly switching between the state in which each of the character images MJ of "S", "Ma", "I", and "Ru" is randomly visible and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. In addition, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL are displayed. Sometimes they overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(H) to 70(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are randomly switched between the visible state and the difficult-to-view state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 being interposed. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect in which the timer value is 0 (zero) is performed, the expectation suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation of the big hit in the variation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. To be done. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect C. As shown in FIG. 71A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transparent display effect C, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the decorative pattern repeats the variable display and the stop display, and the stop display is shown here. In this way, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern repeats the variable display and the stop display. Here, this timer image TM1 is executed as one of the prefetch effects. This timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing the timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image other than a numerical image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, the decorative design or the timer image TM1 that is stopped and displayed and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped with each other to be visually recognized. Be done. By this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the stop-displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 71C and 71D, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 70(D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” which has transparency and overlaps with the current timer value “5” is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT is transparent, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral "4" are images that are outside the display screen 7a. The next timer value image NT is reduced in size in a state where it overlaps with the timer image TM1, and the size and display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is represented. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position match the portion "5" of the timer image TM1 and the timer image is displayed as "4" of the next timer value image NT. Immediately after the size and position of "5" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4".

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 71D and 71E, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 71D, when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has been completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of being. A timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, a character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and a smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position on the light guide plate 17. The composite effect is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL are visible when two or three of them are sometimes overlapped.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71F and 71G, the random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect of repeatedly switching between the state in which each of the character images MJ of "S", "Ma", "I", and "Ru" is randomly visible and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. In addition, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL are displayed. Sometimes they overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(H) to 71(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are randomly switched between the visible state and the difficult-to-view state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect in which the timer value is 0 (zero) is performed, the expectation suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation of the big hit in the variation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. To be done. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect D]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect D. As shown in FIG. 72A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transparent display effect C, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72C, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the stop-displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears as shown in FIG. 72(E), the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 72(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72G, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. These effects are the same as the image transparent display effect C. That is, in the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, each of the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. When the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has been completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of being. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position on the light guide plate 17. The composite effect in which is displayed is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. In the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL, two or three of them are sometimes overlapped and visible. After that, the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without using the first movable accessory 14 (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(I), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superposition effect, as shown in FIG. 72(J), the stop-displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started. In addition, in the above, it is assumed that it is performed over a plurality of variable displays, but it may be performed by one variation. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 72(B) and FIG. 72(H) may be temporary stop displays.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of image transparent display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the light guide plate 17 that can switch the smile image SL between the visible state and the difficult-to-see state, and the character image MJ and the difficult-to-see state. And a first movable accessory 14 that can be switched to a different state, the light guide plate 17 is transparent, and the character image MJ displayed on the first movable accessory 14 through the light guide plate 17. It is possible to execute an image transmissive display effect that makes it visible. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transparent display effect, the character image MJ displayed on the first movable accessory 14 is visible through the light guide plate 17, An effect that allows the smile image SL to be visually recognized on the light guide plate 17 is included. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, a smile image SL represented by the light guide plate 17 and a character image MJ represented by the first movable accessory 14 are included in the image transmissive display effect. Includes effects that can be viewed in an overlapping manner. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, a state in which the smile image SL can be visually recognized and a state in which the smile image SL is difficult to visually recognize are alternately arranged at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. Includes renditions. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable, and in the image transparent display effect, the first character image MJ is visible in the first state. An effect in which the movable accessory 14 moves is included. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 has transparency, and the gaming machine 1 further visually recognizes the image IZ. The display screen 7a that can be switched to a difficult state is provided, and the image IZ represented on the display screen 7a is visually recognized through the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14 in the image transparent display effect. Includes possible productions. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light guide plate 17 that can switch the smile image SL between the visible state and the difficult-to-see state, and the timer image TM1 and the visually difficult state. The display screen 7a that can be switched to a different state, the light guide plate 17 is transparent, and the timer image TM1 shown on the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17 A transparent display effect can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the image transparent display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, the image IZ is supposed to be displayed on the display screen 7a. However, an image having a content different from the image IZ may be displayed on the display screen 7a similarly to the image IZ. For example, it may be a specific character image, or may be a specific character, figure, symbol or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 69 to 72 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the image transparent display effect A of FIG. 69, variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 72 and explosion effect after the smile image SL is displayed may be combined. Further, the timer image TM1 of FIGS. 70 and 71 may be displayed in the image transparent display effect D of FIG.
[Modification 3]
In the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 70 and 71, the timer value of the timer image TM1 is finally set to zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM1 may end other than zero. For example, the first expectation suggestive image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2). In the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 70 and 71, the first expectation suggestive image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 4]
In the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 69 to 72, the smile image SL and the timer image TM1 are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A first image display area capable of switching the first image between a visible state and a visually difficult state;
A gaming machine having a second image display area capable of switching between a second image visible state and a visually difficult state,
The first image display area is transparent, and it is possible to perform a specific effect in which the second image displayed in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area. A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
In the specific effect, the first image is visually recognized in the first image display area while the second image displayed in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area. A gaming machine characterized by including possible effects.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
The specific effect includes an effect that allows the first image displayed in the first image display area and the second image displayed in the second image display area to be overlapped and visually recognized. And the gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-3,
The specific effect includes an effect in which a state in which the first image is visible and a state in which the first image is difficult to see are alternately repeated at a plurality of different positions in the first image area.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
The second image display area is configured to be movable,
The specific effect includes an effect of moving the second image display area while the second image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5,
The second image display area has transparency,
The gaming machine further comprises
The third image display area is provided, which can switch the third image between a visible state and a visually difficult state.
The specific effect includes an effect that allows the third image displayed in the third image display area to be visually recognized through the first image display area and the second image display area. A gaming machine to do.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
A game machine characterized in that the second image is a timer image.

The image combination effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. This image combination effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image combination effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. It is an effect to display an image on.

[Image combination effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. As shown in FIG. 73(A), in the image combination effect A, a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. .. This variable display is visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face on the rear side display screen 7a of the smile face character image are displayed. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the contour of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73(E) and 73(F), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(F), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). As shown in FIG. 73(G), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73(H) to 73(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are randomly switched between the visible state and the difficult-to-view state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (First aspect). Further, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. As shown in FIG. 74(A), in the image combination effect B, on the display screen 7a, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. .. Further, the effect image EF is displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display and effect image EF are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

The effect image EF is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the effect image. The image combination effect is executed by the EF. Specifically, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and has an effect as if light is emitted from the smile face character image. Therefore, the effect image EF can be said to be an image related to the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 74(D) and 74(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The effect image EF and the variable display are continuously displayed, and can be visually recognized without using the first movable accessory 14. Then, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the effect image EF disappears.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 74(G) and 74(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed in a region of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14, and has the shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area of the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the following image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the follow-up images TJ includes a face image of the character, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the following image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movements of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area behind the four transmissive members on the display screen 7a is reduced, so that the display area of the following image TJ is also reduced. With such an effect, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members as seen from the player. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7 a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 being interposed. (First aspect). Further, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. As shown in FIG. 75(A), in the image combination effect C, on the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. .. This variable display is visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed with the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN. The smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN has the same size and the same content as the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a, and the two images overlap. From this, it can be said that the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a is an image related to the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the character images DS, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The smile image DS is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(E), the smile image DS disappears, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the stop-displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. In the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). When the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visible. Directing is done. In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has been completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of being. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position on the light guide plate 17. The composite effect in which is displayed is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. In the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL, two or three of them are sometimes overlapped and visible. After that, the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without using the first movable accessory 14 (second mode). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(J), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above, it is assumed that it is performed over a plurality of variable displays, but it may be performed by one variation. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 75(E) or FIG. 75(J) may be a temporary stop display.

[Image combination effect D]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. As shown in FIG. 76(A), in the image combination effect D, on the display screen 7a, the decorative design variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. .. This variable display is visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face on the rear side display screen 7a of the smile face character image are displayed. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the contour of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a light guide plate display change effect is executed. Specifically, the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "a", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 are displayed. A superimposing effect is performed so that the smile image SL of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character image MJ to the character partial image BN. That is, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. As a result, a smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "a", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 are displayed. A superimposing effect is performed so that the smile image SL of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(H) and 75(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “a”, and “ru” are randomly visible on each of the four transmissive members. Further, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped with each other to be visually recognized. .. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (First aspect). Further, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of image combination production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the first movable accessory 14 having four image display areas (movable light guide plates) that are transparent and movable has four image display areas. , A first state in which they are relatively close to each other, and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other, and the character partial image BN can be switched between a visible state and a visually difficult state, respectively. Yes, in the first state, the first partial effect of forming one smile face character image by the entire four character partial images BN is performed by making the character partial images BN visible. You can With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a display screen 7a that can switch between a state in which an image is visible and a state in which it is difficult to view the image is provided, and the image display area of the first movable accessory 14 The image displayed on the display screen 7a is visible through the (movable light guide plate), and in the first effect, the effect image EF related to the smile face character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 are respectively displayed on the display screen 7a in the second state. They are arranged at the positions corresponding to the four corners, and each of them moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second state to the first state. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 transition to the second state after the first effect. .. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 each have a character image MJ different from the character partial image BN. It is possible to switch between a visible state and a difficult-to-recognize state, and a state in which the character image MJ is visible and a difficult-to-see state are repeated while transitioning from the first state to the second state. The production can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a light guide plate 17 that can switch between a state where an image is visible and a state where it is difficult to visually recognize is provided. In the first effect, the light guide plate 17 is used. Thus, the smiley face character image formed by the four character partial images BN can be visually recognized. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the image combination effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 73, the smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN represented by the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14. However, the target of the whole image represented by the whole of the partial images displayed on the four members (movable light guide plates) is not limited to the character image. For example, the entire image may be a specific character, figure, symbol or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the image combination effect A of FIG. 73, the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 75 and the explosion effect after the smile image SL are displayed may be combined. Further, the following image TJ as shown in FIG. 74 may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76, the smile image SL and the character image MJ are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of transparent and movable first image display areas,
The plurality of first image display areas are
A first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other,
It is possible to switch between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state for a given image,
In the first state, by making each of the predetermined images visible, it is possible to execute a first effect of forming an image representing one specific target in the plurality of predetermined images. A gaming machine characterized by the following.
◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1 further includes:
It has a second image display area that can switch the image between visible and difficult to see.
The image represented in the second image display area can be visually recognized through the one image display area,
In the first effect, an image related to the image representing the specific target is displayed in the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
In the second state, the plurality of first image display areas are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the second image display area, and the second state is changed to the first state. A game machine characterized by moving toward the vicinity of the center of the second image display area when making a transition.
◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
After the first effect, the plurality of first image display areas transit to the second state.
◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The plurality of first image display areas are
It is possible to switch between a state in which an image different from the predetermined image is visible and a state in which it is difficult to view,
While transitioning from the first state to the second state, it is possible to execute a second effect that repeats a state in which an image different from the specific image is visible and a state in which the image is difficult to view. A gaming machine to do.
◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5,
It has a third image display area that can switch the image between visible and difficult to see.
In the first effect, an image representing the specific target can be visually recognized through the third image display area.

The interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. This interlocking effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative design. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect to display an image.

[Interlocking production A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. Further, each of the four transmissive members is configured to be movable in front of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the interlocking effect A, the decorative design variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a. This variable display is visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

At this time, the related image display effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face on the rear side display screen 7a of the smile face character image are displayed. An image related to the face character image may be displayed. For example, the effect image EF may be displayed according to the contour of the smile face character image. If the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image matching the contour of the smile face character image, the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. This can further entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(D) and 77(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. After that, each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14 (first mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(F), 77(G), and 74(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a (transition from the first mode to the second mode). At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed in a region of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14, and has the shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area of the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the following image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. In other words, the four following images TJ have shapes along the outer shapes of the four transmissive members, respectively. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. In this interlocking effect, when the four (transparent member) transmissive areas transition from the first mode to the second mode, the four follow-up images TJ move in conjunction with the movements of the four transmissive areas, Each of the moving follow-up images TJ can be visually recognized through each of the four moving transparent areas. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the follow-up images TJ includes a face image of the character, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the following image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movements of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area behind the four transmissive members on the display screen 7a is reduced, so that the display area of the following image TJ is also reduced. With such an effect, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members as seen from the player. Then, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in a region visible without the first movable accessory 14 being visible. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. Due to this superimposition effect, the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Interlocking production B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state.

As shown in FIG. 78(A), in the interlocking effect B, a face image KG that follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. At least a part of the face image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a in a region serving as a back surface of the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the face image KG is visible through a member having four transmissive portions. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The face image KG and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. At this time, the four face images KG on the display screen 7a move (interlock) with the movements of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14, respectively. As a result, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the member having four transmissive properties while the part having four transmissive properties is continuously moving while the four transmissive members are moving. It is in a visible state without a member having.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a movable auditor combination effect is produced in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. Due to the combined effect of the movable role objects, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face on the rear side display screen 7a of the smile face character image are displayed. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the contour of the smile face character image. The effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and has an effect as if light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one target (here, a smile face) is configured by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditors object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. This can further entertain the player. The four face images KG are continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(D) and 78(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the four face images KG on the display screen 7a move (interlock) with the movements of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14, respectively. As a result, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the member having four transmissive properties while the part having four transmissive properties is continuously moving while the four transmissive members are moving. It is in a visible state without a member having.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(E), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 interposed therebetween. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(F), 78(G), and 78(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a frame image WG that follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed in a region of the display screen 7a which is the back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14, and is the outer shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area that is the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, inside the frame image WG, a combination effect in which the character images MJ represented by the four transparent members are visible is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retreated, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. With such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members as seen from the player. Then, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in a region visible without the first movable accessory 14 being visible. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed explode and disappear. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Interlocking production C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), FIG. 79(B), and FIG. 79(C), in the interlocking effect C, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. On the display screen 7a, four timer images TM that follow (interlock) with the movements of the four transparent members are displayed. The timer image TM is an image displayed in the area that is the back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 in the display screen 7a, and is a two-digit number that represents the timer value (count value). Numerical image (digital display image) is included. The timer image TM has a frame image having substantially the same shape as the outer shapes of the four transparent members. The frame image has a shape along the outer shape of a region of the display screen 7a which is the back surface of the four transparent members. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image also has the same rectangular shape. The timer image TM looks to the player as if it is displayed on four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four timer images TM are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the four timer images TM are displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Also, here, the four timer images TM have different timer values “10”, “14”, “15”, and “12” set, and the respective timer values are decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(D) and 79(E), when the timer value of one (here, upper left) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM, and The retreat movement effect of the transparent member corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, from the state where one of the four transmissive members (upper left in this case) forming the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a, the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a are set. Move towards. The other three permeable members do not move. The upper left timer image TM having the timer value of 0 (zero) moves (interlocks) with the movement of the upper left transparent member. As a result, the timer image TM is displayed on the member having transparency and appears to be moving as it is to the player. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(F) and 79(G), when the timer value of the next one (here, lower right) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image is displayed. The retracting movement effect of the transparent member corresponding to the timer image TM of the TM and the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, among the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining three members covering the display screen 7a covers the display screen 7a. Move toward the retreat positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining two transparent members do not move. The lower right timer image TM with the timer value of 0 (zero) moves (interlocks) with the movement of the lower right transparent member. As a result, the timer image TM is displayed on the member having transparency and appears to be moving as it is to the player. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), when the timer value of the next one (here, upper right) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and the first movable image. The retreat movement effect of the transparent member corresponding to the timer image TM of the accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, among the four transmissive members forming the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining two members covering the display screen 7a covers the display screen 7a. It moves toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining one permeable member does not move. The upper right timer image TM with the timer value of 0 (zero) moves (follows (interlocks) with the movement of the upper right transparent member. As a result, the timer image TM is displayed on the member having transparency and appears to be moving as it is to the player. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(I) and 79(J), when the timer value of the last one (here, lower left) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM is generated. , And the retreat movement effect of the transparent member corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Then, after the entire variable display becomes visible, the decorative design is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79(J).

[Interlocking production D]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state.

In the interlocking effect D, as shown in FIGS. 80(A), 80(B), and 80(C), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a frame image WG that follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed in a region of the display screen 7a which is the back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14, and is the outer shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area that is the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are visible through the light guide plate 17. Has become.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. Here, a combination effect that allows the character partial image BN to be visually recognized is executed inside the frame image WG. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, the four character partial images BN come close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific target in the entire four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D) and FIG. 80(E), the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other. At this time, the four frame images WG on the display screen 7a move toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retreated, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. With such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members as seen from the player.

As shown in FIG. 80(D), in the display screen 7a, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in an area visible without the first movable accessory 14 being visible. To be done. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 80(E), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed explode and disappear. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), FIG. 80(G), and FIG. 80(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG that continuously follows (interlocks) with the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. Because of the configuration similar to that described above, the frame image WG appears to be displayed by the four transparent members as seen from the player. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, inside the frame image WG, a combination effect in which the character images MJ represented by the four transparent members are visible is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retreated, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. With such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members as seen from the player. Then, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in a region visible without the first movable accessory 14 being visible. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, the effect that the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible is executed. Since the smile images SL can be visually recognized at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible because the smile images SL are overlapped with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the stop-displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 on the stop-displayed decorative pattern, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of interlocking production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the first movable accessory 14 that is transparent and movable and the display screen 7a that can display an image are provided. The first movable accessory 14 is movable in front of the display screen 7a, and the first movable accessory 14 and the follow-up image TJ displayed on the display screen 7a move in association with each other to move. It is possible to execute the interlocking effect in which the moving follower image TJ can be visually confirmed via 14. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the first movable accessory 14 includes four transmissive regions (movable light guide plates) that are both transmissive and movable. The transmissive regions can be transitioned to a first mode in which they are relatively close to each other and a second mode in which they are relatively separated from each other. In the interlocking effect, four transmissive regions transit from the first mode to the second mode. At this time, the four follow-up images TJ move in association with the movement of each of the four transparent areas, and each of the moving follow-up images TJ can be visually recognized through each of the four moving transparent areas. Become. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmission regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 respectively correspond to the four corners of the display screen 7a in the second mode. They are arranged at positions, and when the second mode shifts to the first mode, they move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the following image TJ has a shape along the outer shape of each of the four transmission regions (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14. .. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 can each display the character partial image BN, and the transmissive areas are displayed. It is possible to execute a combination effect by the character partial image BN to be played and the effect image EF displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the light guide plate 17 which is transparent and is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is provided. It is possible to display the smile image SL, and it is possible to execute a combination effect by the smile image SL displayed by the light guide plate 17 and the decorative pattern displayed by the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of interlocking production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The follow-up image TJ in FIG. 77 is not limited to the above configuration. The follow-up image TJ may be, for example, an image having a shape substantially along the outer shapes of the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14, or a part of the outer shape of the four members (movable light guide plate). It may be an image having a shape along the line. The shape that is substantially along means a shape that allows the player to recognize that the outer shapes of the four members (movable light guide plates) and the shape of the following image TJ image correspond to each other.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the interlocking effects of FIGS. 77 to 80 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the interlocking effect A of FIG. 77, the timer image TM as shown in FIG. 79, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the retreat movement effect may be combined.
[Modification 3]
77 to 80, the smile image SL and the character image MJ displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14 may be displayed randomly or have a certain regularity. May be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A movable accessory that is transparent and movable,
A game machine including an image display area capable of displaying an image,
The movable accessory is movable in front of the image display area,
By the interlocking movement of the movable accessory and the specific image displayed in the image display area, a linked effect in which the moving specific image can be visually confirmed through the moving movable accessory. A game machine characterized by being executable.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
The movable accessory includes a plurality of transparent regions that are both transparent and movable,
The plurality of transmissive regions can transition between a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other,
In the interlocking effect, when the plurality of transmissive areas transition from the first state to the second state, the plurality of specific images move and interlock with movement of each of the plurality of transmissive areas. A gaming machine, wherein each of the specific images that are moving can be visually recognized through each of the plurality of transparent areas inside.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2,
The plurality of transmissive areas are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the image display area in the second state, and when the second state transits to the first state, A gaming machine characterized by moving toward the center of the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2 or A7-3,
The specific image has a shape along the outer shape of each of the plurality of transparent regions.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
Each of the plurality of transparent regions is capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a combination effect by an image displayed by the transparent area and an image displayed by the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
Having a front surface area that is transparent and is arranged in front of the movable accessory and the image display area,
The front area is capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a combination effect can be executed by an image displayed by the front area and an image displayed by the image display area.

The hold icon image matching effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. This hold icon image matching effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon image matching effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This hold icon image matching effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). It should be noted that the hold icon image matching effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Hold icon image matching effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect A.
In the hold icon image matching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the diamond image XB11 is arranged in the rectangular image XB12. The rhombus image XB11 has a brick-like pattern, and the letter “S” is shown in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a specific image absorbing effect is executed. In this specific image absorbing effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to absorb the specific image XB1. Therefore, the specific image XB1 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the diamond image XB11 of the specific image XB1 absorbed by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the hold icon display area in which the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A, The shape is changed to the same shape as the diamond image XB11 (one of pre-reading effects). The size of the hold icon 9A that has changed to the same shape as the diamond image XB11 is smaller than that of the diamond image XB11.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect A, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the shape in which a part of the specific image XB1 (diamond image XB11) is reduced.

[Hold icon image matching effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect B.
In the hold icon image matching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is a rhombus, has a brick-like pattern, and the letter “S” is shown in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82C, a specific image absorbing effect is executed. In this specific image absorbing effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to absorb the specific image XB2. Therefore, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the character CRA sucks out the specific image XB2 in the direction of the hold icon display area in which the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A has the same shape as the specific image XB2. Change to hold (one of pre-reading effects). The size of the hold icon 9A that has changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than that of the specific image XB2.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect B, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2 itself.

[Hold icon image matching effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect C.
In the hold icon image matching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is a rhombus, has a brick-like pattern, and the letter “S” is shown in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a third movable accessory effect is executed. In this third movable accessory effect, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable accessory 18. In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18. Here, the integrally formed product (mark, design product) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the specific image absorbing effect is executed. In this specific image absorbing effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to absorb the specific mark (or the specific image XB2). At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to the home position.
At the timing of the specific image absorption effect, instead of the specific image absorption effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the character CRA sucks out the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is specified. The same shape as the image XB2 is held and changed (one of pre-reading effects). The size of the hold icon 9A that has changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than that of the specific image XB2.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect C, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2.

[Hold icon image matching effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect D.
In the hold icon image matching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a brick-like pattern, and the letter “S” is shown in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a third movable accessory effect is executed. In this third movable accessory effect, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable accessory 18. In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18. Here, the integrally formed product (mark, design product) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the specific image absorbing effect is executed. In this specific image absorbing effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to absorb the specific mark. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to the home position.
At the timing of the specific image absorption effect, instead of the specific image absorption effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific mark sucked by the character CRA is pushed out toward the hold icon display area in which the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is held in the same shape as the specific mark. Change (one of the look-ahead effects). The size of the hold icon 9A that has changed to the same shape as the specific mark is smaller than that of the specific mark.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect D, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the shape in which the specific mark is reduced.

It should be noted that in the hold icon image matching effects A to D, other effects (such as other hold icon image matching effects) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon image matching effect.
[Effect 1]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific image is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon that is partly the same as the specific image is displayed in the hold icon change effect. To be done. According to this configuration, since the specific image and one of the hold icons are partly in the same form, the display of the specific image can increase the player's expectation of the change in the hold, and The interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the hold icon image matching effects B and C, the specific image XB2 is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon having the same form (shape) as the specific image XB2 is displayed in the hold icon change effect. According to this configuration, the specific image XB2 and one of the hold icons have the same aspect (shape), so that the display of the specific image XB2 can further increase the player's expectation for the change in hold. , The interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D, the hold icon change effect is performed after the specific image display effect. According to this configuration, since the hold icon change effect is performed after the display of the specific image, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the hold change when the specific image is displayed. The interest of can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D, the normal hold icon is displayed before the display of the specific image, and after the display of the specific image, the hold icon having at least a part of the specific image from the normal hold icon. A holding change effect that changes to is performed. With this configuration, the display of the hold icon having at least a part of the specific image can be emphasized, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the hold icon image matching effects C to D, the third character moving effect for moving the third movable character 18 is executed when the specific image XB2 is displayed. With this configuration, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the hold icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is displayed, the third accessory moving effect that moves the third movable accessory 18 is executed, and the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory are performed. And 18 form one mark (specific mark). According to this configuration, since the specific mark can be formed by the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory 18, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the hold icon image matching effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon image matching effect of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the specific image and the hold icon have a part of the same shape (or the same shape), but the specific image and the hold icon have a part of the same shape (or the same shape). ), for example, the specific image and the hold icon may have the same or the same outline shape, or may have the same or the same pattern or color.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, the color of the hold icon changed to hold in the hold icon change effect may be different from or the same as the color of the specific mark.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, the third movable accessory 18 may be moved to hide the hold icon once to hide the hold icon, and then the hold icon may be changed. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 may cover the entire hold icon or a part thereof.

[Modification 4]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, the hold change in the hold icon change effect may be performed after the third movable auditors product 18 returns from the deployed position to the home position.

[Modification 5]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, when the third movable accessory 18 moves to the end of the display screen 7a, an image moving from the end toward the hold icon is displayed, and the image is The hold change may be performed when the hold icon is reached. In this case, when the image reaches the hold icon, a suggestion image indicating that it has arrived is displayed. This end may be at a position facing the position at which the hold icon is displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image larger than the hold icon of the first aspect,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are , Part of the same aspect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
The hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are the same aspect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-1 or aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a hold icon of a second aspect different from the shape of the hold icon of the first aspect,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second display effect, and the hold icon of the second aspect displayed in the third display effect in the first display effect. Instead of, the hold icon of the first aspect is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of moving a movable accessory in front of the display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-5,
In the combination effect, one mark is formed by the predetermined image of the second display effect and the movable accessory of the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The movable accessory impact effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This movable accessory impact production can be executed during the change of the special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory impact effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This movable accessory impact production is performed during one variation (one variation production) of the special symbol. It should be noted that the movable accessory impact effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Movable accessory impact production A]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect A.
In the movable accessory impact effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the accessory moving effect is executed. In this accessory moving effect, the peripheral edge of the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is a position that does not cover the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. Therefore, the player can see that the peripheral edge of the second movable accessory 15 and the upper edge of the display screen 7a are adjacent to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), the pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is held and changed while the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 85(C), the hold icon 9A that has changed to hold is shown by cross hatching. The hold change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable accessory impact production B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect B.
In the movable accessory impact effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the accessory moving effect is executed. In this accessory moving effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, to the player, it seems that a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is held and changed while the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 86(C), the hold icon 9A that has changed to hold is indicated by cross hatching. The hold change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable accessory impact production C]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect C.
In the movable accessory impact effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the accessory moving effect is executed. In this accessory moving effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, to the player, it seems that a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a screen shaking effect is executed. This screen shaking effect is an effect that the display screen 7a is shaken by the impact of the second movable accessory 15 moving to the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the display screen 7a. A state in which the character CRA (character display area) and the hold icons 9A and 9C (hold area) are shaken (vibrated) is shown. In addition, in this screen shaking effect, a predetermined sound effect (such as beep) is notified from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is changed by the screen shaking effect. In FIG. 87(D), the hold icon 9A that has changed to hold is shown by cross hatching. The hold change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.
The screen shaking effect and the pending change effect may be performed at the same time.

[Movable accessory impact production D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect D.
In the movable accessory impact effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the accessory moving effect is executed. In this accessory moving effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, to the player, it seems that a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the inazuma effect is executed. In this Inazuma production, the Inazuma image XC1 is displayed as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the display screen 7a. The Inazuma image XC1 is an image showing a state in which the Inazuma extends from the second movable accessory 15 toward the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the inazuma arrival suggestion effect is executed. In this Inazuma arrival suggestion effect, the Inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed by performing the Inazuma arrival effect. Inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed around the hold icon 9A reached by Inazuma image XC1 from the second movable accessory 15 by the Inazuma effect, and indicates that Inazuma reached the hold icon 9A. This is a suggestive image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the hold icon 9A displaying the arrival suggestion image XC2 changes to hold. The hold change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

In addition, in the above-mentioned movable accessory impact effects A to D, other effects (such as other movable accessory impact effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the hold icons 9a, 9b, 9c are displayed in the hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end portion facing the upper end portion on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of a movable accessory impact production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the hold icon of the first mode (the same mode as the decorative symbol variation process, a normal mode) is displayed, the second movable mode. By performing the accessory movable effect in which the accessory 15 is movable, and by performing the accessory movable effect, one of the hold icons changes to hold and becomes the hold icon in the second mode. According to this configuration, since the character moving effect is performed when the holding is changed, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot just by moving the movable character (the second movable character 15). The interest of can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the pending change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end portion (upper end portion) of the display screen 7a. According to this structure, since the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, the movable accessory (second movable accessory 15). It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the jackpot just by moving to the end of the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the movable accessory impact effects B to D, the pending change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end portion (upper end portion) of the display screen 7a. According to this structure, since the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, the movable accessory (the second movable accessory) is performed. Only by moving 15) to the front of the end of the display screen 7a, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a jackpot and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the hold icon is displayed in the hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end corresponding to the upper end on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper end portion of the display screen 7a, the holding icon located at the lower end portion facing the upper end portion changes to be held, so that a dynamic effect is obtained as a whole of the effect. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the movable accessory impact effect C, a screen swaying effect is performed and a pending change effect is performed by performing the accessory movable effect effect. According to this configuration, by moving the second movable accessory 15, the screen shaking effect is performed by the impact, and the holding change effect is performed, so that the holding change effect can be emphasized by the screen shaking effect. The interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-described movable accessory impact effect C, a predetermined sound effect (such as beep) is notified from the speaker 67 in the screen shake effect. According to this configuration, when the screen shaking effect is performed and the hold change effect is performed, the hold change effect can be highlighted by a predetermined sound effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a movable accessory impact production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 comes to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon changes to hold, but this is not a limitation. Instead, the hold icon may be changed to hold only when the second movable accessory 15 moves. Further, the hold icon may be changed to hold when the second movable accessory 15 comes to the lower end, the left end, the right end, the central part, etc., instead of the upper end of the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display effect is an effect for moving a movable accessory,
The third display effect is an effect of changing the hold icon of the first aspect to the hold icon of the second aspect,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed and the second display effect is performed. , The third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
The movable accessory is a home position at a position different from the front of the display means,
In the combined effect, in the second display effect, an accessory moving effect is performed in which the movable accessory is moved from the home position to the first end portion of the display unit, thereby performing the third display effect. Is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an accessory moving effect is performed in which the movable accessory is moved from the home position to the front of the first end portion of the display unit, thereby performing the third effect. Display performance is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-2 or aspect XC-3,
The hold icon is displayed on the display area in a hold area that is arranged adjacent to a second end opposite to the first end.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed, so that a predetermined display area including the holding area in the display unit is shaken, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
In the combination effect, a predetermined sound effect is notified when the shaking effect is performed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The pending display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. This hold display effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), and more specifically, the hold display of the first special symbol. It is an effect of integrally displaying the hold display of the second special symbol and displaying it in a plurality of places.

[Hold display effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A.
In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that, in FIG. 89(A), the game state is a normal state (low accurate low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a hold number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2, which are indicated by numerals, are displayed in the area close to each other on the left and right. For example, the number-of-holds display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white in a conspicuous manner. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of holdings by numbers, are displayed vertically close to each other. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the hold display effect A, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 is integrally displayed at two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the numbers of these holdings are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 89(A), H1, K1 indicate "3", H2, K2 indicate "0", the number of first special symbols reserved is "3", the number of second special symbols reserved " 0” is suggested. This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold display effect A, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) can be displayed, but here The description and the illustration are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the loss confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89(A) is lost. In this example, "758" is shown as the lost symbol array. Further, in the lost confirmation effect, the number H1, K1 of holding the first special symbol is "3", and the number of holdings H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is shown in FIG. 89(A). The same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of holdings related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start changing, the number of holdings H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from “3” to “2”. The numbers H2 and K2 of reservations relating to the second special symbol remain "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 89C has been a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the number H1, K1 of holding the first special symbol is "2", the number of holding H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 89(C). It is similar to the symbol variation effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when this jackpot game ends, a time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize is given to the second starting opening 21, so the decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol decrease from “2” to “1”. After that, it is assumed that there are three winnings to the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number H2, K2 of holdings related to the second special symbol is increased from "0" to "3". And When the time saving game is started, a right hitting arrow YAR for urging the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to right-handedly, so that the electric ball 22 is frequently opened and the player can easily win the prize. Can be made In addition, during this period, there is almost no winning in the first starting opening 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89(E) is lost. In this example, "857" is shown as the lost symbol array. Also, in the case of confirmation of lost time reduction, the number of holdings H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is “1”, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is “3”, which is shown in FIG. This is the same as the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation effect shown in E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time-saving fluctuation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol. , K2 is reduced from “3” to “2”. The numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol remain “1”. This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect B.
In the hold display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that, in FIG. 90(A), the game state is a normal state (low accurate low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a hold number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2, which are indicated by numerals, are displayed in the area close to each other on the left and right. For example, the number-of-holds display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white in a conspicuous manner. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of holdings by numbers, are displayed vertically close to each other. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the hold display effect B, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 is integrally displayed at two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the numbers of these holdings are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 90(A), H1, K1 indicate "2", H2, K2 indicate "0", the number of first special symbols reserved is "2", the number of second special symbols reserved " 0” is suggested. This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold display effect B, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) can be displayed, but here. The description and the illustration are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 90(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the accessory first moving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect production shown in FIG. 90(B), the role product first movable production moves the homework position YA from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 90(C), and the upper portion of the display screen 7a is displayed. It is arranged to stop in front of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time so as to cover it. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the reserved number display area HR is covered with the accessory YA, and therefore, the reserved number H1 and the second special symbol related to the first special symbol are related. H2, which indicates the number of reservations, is invisible. On the other hand, in a state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are not covered by the character YA. It is visible, therefore, the player visually recognizes K1, K2 (K1 is "2", K2 is "0"), and is related to the number of reserves and the second special symbol related to the first special symbol. You can grasp the number of holds. In addition, the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged movably up and down on the upper back side of the board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1) described above, and is located inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), the accessory second moving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the second movable effect of the accessory, the accessory YA is stopped at the first position shown in FIG. 90(C) for a predetermined time, and then further lowered to the second position shown in FIG. 90(D) to display the display screen. The display 7a is stopped at a front side for a predetermined time so as to cover a lower portion of the display 7a. In a state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are covered by the character YA, and , K1 and K2 are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the number-of-holding display area HR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA, and therefore, the player has H1, H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2", H2 is "0"), the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol can be grasped. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
In this way, even when the accessory LYA as the movable body is moved, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen 7a is The number of holdings relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 displayed at any place can be visually confirmed. In other words, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen 7a is all even when the accessory LYA as a movable body moves. Does not become invisible, and the number of holdings relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 displayed at at least one place is visible. Therefore, the player can always grasp the information on the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21, and can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 90(B) has been a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the number H1, K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol is "2", the number of reservations H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is shown in FIGS. 90(A) to (D). Is the same as that shown in. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when this jackpot game ends, a time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), the decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize is given to the second starting opening 21, so the decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol decrease from “2” to “1”. After that, it is assumed that there are three winnings to the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number H2, K2 of holdings related to the second special symbol is increased from "0" to "3". And When the time saving game is started, a right hitting arrow YAR for urging the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to right-handedly, so that the electric ball 22 is frequently opened and the player can easily win the prize. Can be made In addition, during this period, there is almost no winning in the first starting opening 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect shows that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 90(F) is lost. In this example, "857" is shown as the lost symbol array. In addition, in the case of confirmation of lost time reduction, the number of holdings H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is “1”, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is “3”, which is shown in FIG. This is the same as the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation effect shown in F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time-saving fluctuation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol. , K2 is reduced from “3” to “2”. The numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol remain “1”. This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C.
In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that, in FIG. 91(A), the game state is a normal state (low accurate low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating numbers of reserved numbers are displayed close to each other in the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR, directly above H1 and H2, the variation display of the special symbol is suggested by changing the display in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Four symbols F1 and F2 are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the shape of a circle, for example, F1 is displayed in red (hatched) and F2 is displayed in blue (polka dot pattern), which are different from each other. F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating by blinking and that the special symbol is stopped (displaying the symbol) by stopping by turning on or off. For example, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit by stopping both F1 and F2 in a lighting state, and a state in which both F1 and F2 are not lighting (either F1 or F2 is off, And, by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are both turned off, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of holdings by numbers, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed in a close proximity in a column shape. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and indicates that the special symbol is changing by changing the number from 0 to 9, and the special symbol is stopped by stopping at any number from 0 to 9. Indicates that it is stopped (displaying symbols). For example, DY stops at the number 7 suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and DY stops at numbers other than 7 suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a miss. ..
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 are integrally displayed at two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. .. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 and the fourth symbol are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of these holdings, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are always continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and are never erased. is there.
In FIG. 91(A), H1, K1 indicate "3", H2, K2 indicate "0", the number of first special symbols reserved is "3", the number of second special symbols reserved is " 0” is suggested. This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, DY is in a changing state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being changed and displayed. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can be displayed, but here The description and the illustration are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the loss confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91(A) is lost. In this example, "758" is shown as the lost symbol array. Further, in the lost confirmation effect, the number H1, K1 of holding the first special symbol is "3", and the number of holdings H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is shown in FIG. 89(A). The same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. Further, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (the turn-off state of F1 is indicated by "●", the turn-off state of F2 is indicated by "○"), DY is stopped at 6 (a number other than 7), and Suggests that the lottery results for special symbols are lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of holdings related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start changing, the number of holdings H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from “3” to “2”. The numbers H2 and K2 of reservations relating to the second special symbol remain "0". Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 91(C) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the number H1, K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol is "2", the number of reservations H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 91(C). It is similar to the symbol variation effect. In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are lit (the lighting state of F1 is red (shown by hatching), the lighting state of F2 is blue (shown by a polka dot pattern), DY is stopped at 7, and thus the special symbol is shown. It is suggested that the lottery result is a big hit.In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. In this example, the jackpot symbol array “777” is a “16RV scheduled big jackpot” (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the gaming state is high until the next jackpot. It is a big hit that will bring you to a certainty and short time (high accuracy and high base condition).

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when this jackpot game ends, a time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize is given to the second starting opening 21, so the decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol decrease from “2” to “1”. After that, it is assumed that there are three winnings to the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number H2, K2 of holdings related to the second special symbol is increased from "0" to "3". And Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed. When the time saving game is started, a right hitting arrow YAR for urging the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to right-handedly, so that the electric ball 22 is frequently opened and the player can easily win the prize. Can be made In addition, during this period, there is almost no winning in the first starting opening 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect shows that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91(E) is lost. In this example, "857" is shown as the lost symbol array. Also, in the case of the confirmation time for losing confirmation, the number H1, K1 of holdings related to the first special symbol is "1", and the number of holdings H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "3", which is shown in FIG. This is the same as the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation effect shown in E). Also, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are both turned off (the turn-off state of F1 is indicated by "●" and the turn-off state of F2 is indicated by "○"), DY is stopped at 9 (a number other than 7), and Suggests that the lottery results for special symbols are lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time-saving fluctuation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol. , K2 is reduced from “3” to “2”. The numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol remain “1”. This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D.
In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 92(A), the game state is a normal state (low accurate low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating numbers of reserved numbers are displayed close to each other in the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR, directly above H1 and H2, the variation display of the special symbol is suggested by changing the display in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Four symbols F1 and F2 are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the shape of a circle, for example, F1 is displayed in red (hatched) and F2 is displayed in blue (polka dot pattern), which are different from each other. F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating by blinking and that the special symbol is stopped (displaying the symbol) by stopping by turning on or off. For example, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit by stopping both F1 and F2 in a lighting state, and a state in which both F1 and F2 are not lighting (either F1 or F2 is off, And, by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are both turned off, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of holdings by numbers, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed in a close proximity in a column shape. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and indicates that the special symbol is changing by changing the number from 0 to 9, and the special symbol is stopped by stopping at any number from 0 to 9. Indicates that it is stopped (displaying symbols). For example, DY stops at the number 7 suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and DY stops at numbers other than 7 suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a miss. ..
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 are integrally displayed at two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. .. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 and the fourth symbol are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of these holdings, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are always continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and are never erased. is there.
In FIG. 92(A), H1, K1 indicate "2", H2, K2 indicate "0", the number of first special symbols reserved is "2", the number of second special symbols reserved is " 0” is suggested. This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, DY is in a changing state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being changed and displayed. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can be displayed, but here The description and the illustration are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 92(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. In this reach effect, the numbers H1, K1 for holding the first special symbol, the numbers H2, K2 for holding the second special symbol, and F1, F2, DY as the fourth symbol are shown in FIG. 92(A). This is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the first accessory moving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reach production shown in FIG. 92(B), in the reach production shown in FIG. 92(B), the produce YA moves downward from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. It is arranged to stop for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to cover it. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the game information display area YR is covered with the accessory YA, and therefore, the reserved number H1 related to the first special symbol is related to H1 and the second special symbol. H2 showing the number of reservations, and F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are not visible. On the other hand, in a state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are , Is visible without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, by visually recognizing K1, K2 (K1 is "2", K2 is "0"), the player can grasp the number of holdings related to the first special symbol and the number of holdings related to the second special symbol. It is possible to recognize that the special symbol (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) is being variably displayed by visually recognizing DY (DY is “↓”) as the fourth symbol. In addition, the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged movably up and down on the upper back side of the board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1) described above, and is located inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a second accessory moving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the second movable effect production of the accessory, after the accessory YA is stopped at the first position shown in FIG. 92(C) for a predetermined time, it is further lowered to the second position shown in FIG. 92(D) to display the display screen. The display 7a is stopped at a front side for a predetermined time so as to cover a lower portion of the display 7a. In a state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are It is covered by the object YA, and therefore K1, K2 and DY are not visible. On the other hand, in a state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the game information display area YR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA, and therefore, the player has H1, H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2", H2 is "0"), it is possible to grasp the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and F1 and F2 (F1) as the fourth symbol. , F2 is a blinking state), it is possible to understand that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
As described above, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is moved, the number of holdings of the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 which are integrally displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen 7a and The fourth symbol is displayed at any place, and the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are visible. In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth design relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen 7a, are in the case where the accessory LYA as a movable body moves. Even if all of them are not all invisible, the number of holdings and the fourth symbols relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 displayed in at least one place are made visible. There is. Therefore, the player can always grasp the information on the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21, and can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalized effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 92(B) has been a big hit. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the number H1, K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol is "2", the number of reservations H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "0", which is shown in FIGS. 90(A) to (D). Is the same as that shown in. On the other hand, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol both stop in a lighting state (F1 is red (shown by hatching), F2 is blue (shown by a polka dot pattern)), and DY as the fourth symbol is 7. It stopped, and this suggests that the lottery result for special symbols is a big hit. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when this jackpot game ends, a time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize is given to the second starting opening 21, so the decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol decrease from “2” to “1”. After that, it is assumed that there are three winnings to the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number H2, K2 of holdings related to the second special symbol is increased from "0" to "3". And Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed. When the time saving game is started, a right hitting arrow YAR for urging the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to right-handedly, so that the electric ball 22 is frequently opened and the player can easily win the prize. Can be made In addition, during this period, there is almost no winning in the first starting opening 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect shows that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 92(F) is lost. In this example, "857" is shown as the lost symbol array. Also, in the time loss confirmation time reduction effect, the number H1, K1 of holding the first special symbol is "1", and the number of holdings H2, K2 of the second special symbol is "3", which is shown in FIG. This is the same as the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation effect shown in F). Also, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are both turned off (the turn-off state of F1 is indicated by "●" and the turn-off state of F2 is indicated by "○"), DY is stopped at 9 (a number other than 7), and Suggests that the lottery results for special symbols are lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the decorative symbol time-shortening variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time-saving fluctuation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol. , K2 is reduced from “3” to “2”. The numbers H1 and K1 of reservations related to the first special symbol remain “1”. This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, apart from the holding icons related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening is set. The numbers are configured to be continuously displayed on the display screen as a unit. According to this configuration, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening is always continuously displayed on the display screen as compared with the holding icon that may be erased due to a predetermined effect or the like. The player can confirm the current number of holdings for the first starting opening and the second starting opening at any time. Moreover, since the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening are collectively displayed as a number, the player displays a holding display related to the first starting opening and a holding display related to the second starting opening. The number of holdings can be confirmed at a glance and the contents can be grasped without the trouble of searching. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the variable display is displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol, in addition to the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is a jackpot or not. The fourth design that suggests the result is configured to be continuously and integrally displayed on the display screen together with the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol is continuously displayed on the display screen as compared with the decorative symbol that may be erased due to a predetermined effect, so that the player can always display the current special symbol. It is possible to confirm the display state, that is, whether the special symbol is changing or stopped, and whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a loss. Moreover, since the fourth symbol is integrally displayed with the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, the player is concerned with the holding display related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening. The number of holdings and the fourth symbol can be confirmed at a glance and the contents thereof can be grasped without the trouble of searching the holding display and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are integrally displayed on the display screen. In addition to displaying, it is configured to be displayed at multiple locations on the display screen. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, which is integrally displayed, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are further displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen. Therefore, the player can very easily find the hold display related to the first starting opening, the hold display related to the second starting opening, and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, a fourth symbol that is integrally displayed at a plurality of points on the display screen, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the second starting port Even if the movable body is moved, the number of holdings is the fourth symbol displayed at any place on the display screen, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening, and the number of holdings related to the second starting opening. Are configured to be visible. In other words, the number of holdings and the fourth design related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen, are all visually unrecognizable even when the movable body is moved. It is not possible, and the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening and the second starting opening displayed in at least one place are configured to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can always grasp the number of holdings and the display of the fourth symbol related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, and can enter the game with peace of mind. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are in a diagonal line of the display screen. It is configured to display. According to this configuration, the movable range of the movable body is designed so that the display of the fourth symbol at any one position, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening, and the number of holdings related to the second starting opening can be visually recognized at all times. Will be easier. That is, the restriction on the movable range of the movable body is relaxed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings for the first starting port, and the number of holdings for the second starting port are at the same position on the display screen. It is configured to display without moving. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are always displayed in the same place on the display screen, so that the player is extremely You can easily find these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of hold display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holdings related to the first special symbol, the number of holdings related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are at the upper left and lower right of the display screen. Although they are displayed diagonally, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, the fourth symbol, the upper right and lower left of the display screen, middle upper and middle lower, left middle and right middle, upper left and upper right, lower left and It may be displayed at the lower right or the like. That is, when the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol that are integrally displayed are displayed at a plurality of positions on the display screen, at least the left end and the right end of the display screen, Alternatively, the display may include the upper end and the lower end.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holdings relating to the first special symbol, the number of holdings relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed at the lower right of the display screen are Like the number of reservations related to the first special symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, the fourth symbol, it may be displayed in a predetermined display area. In addition, the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the arrangement of the fourth symbol are arbitrary, and if they are collectively displayed, what kind of display mode Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holdings relating to the first special symbol, the number of holdings relating to the second special symbol, and the number-of-holding display region for displaying the fourth symbol in the area. The game information display area is displayed with a predetermined color, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding number display area and the game information display area may be changed in color depending on the game state. For example, the current game state is suggested by color, such as white when the game state is the normal state, blue when the low precision time saving state, green when the high precision time saving state, and red when the latent state is latent. You may do it.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is displayed by a plurality of graphics (“○”) having different colors, and these graphics are displayed. Although it is suggested that the special symbol is fluctuating or is stopped (while the symbol is being displayed or the lottery result is being displayed) by blinking or stopping, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is added with a symbol (number or letter), and the symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner together with the figure so as to suggest that the special symbol is changing or stopped. Good. For example, when the fourth design is displayed as a figure and a number, this number and another fourth design (DY) displayed as a number at the lower right of the display screen are synchronized, and the same display mode It may be displayed with. In this way, the player can easily understand the relationship between the fourth symbol and the special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed in plural on the same display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display screens are provided in the game area, and the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed one by one (one set) on those display screens. You may do so. Alternatively, apart from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), a 7-segment display is provided in the game area, and the number of holdings relating to the first special symbol, the number of holdings relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed. You may make it display on a screen (display screen 7a, a liquid crystal) and a 7 segment display. Alternatively, in addition to the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), an LED or a lamp indicator is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, the number of holdings relating to the first special symbol, the number of holdings relating to the second special symbol, the fourth The design may be displayed on a display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and an LED or lamp indicator.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A first starting port and a second starting port,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays on a predetermined display screen,
A gaming machine equipped with,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of the number of holdings related to the first starting port and the second starting port,
The display unit integrally displays the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
Based on the winning in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, a special symbol display means for displaying a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is displayed by variably displaying the special symbol,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a fourth symbol that suggests the lottery result by performing a variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol,
The display means integrally displays the fourth symbol with the number of holdings related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display means displays the first display and the second display at a plurality of locations on the display screen,
At least one of the plurality of locations, displays the first display and the second display in a predetermined display area,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-4]
The display screen is formed in a substantially rectangular shape,
The plurality of locations on the display screen on which the first display and the second display are displayed include at least the left end and the right end of the display screen, or the upper end and the lower end,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-5]
A movable body,
Control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined manner,
Equipped with
The first display and the second display displayed at the plurality of locations are the first display displayed at any location even when the movable body is moved by the control unit. And the second display is visible,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4, which is characterized in that

The zone effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. This zone effect can be executed during the change of the special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the zone effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This zone effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one time change effect). It should be noted that the zone effect may be performed during a plurality of changes in the special symbol (a plurality of changes effects).

[Zone production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect A.
In the zone effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry into the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, it is an image in which the letters "first zone" that suggests the first zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestive image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the letters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2 the letters "first zone" move from left to right. To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which the letters "second zone" that suggests the second zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as not to intersect the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left side, the letters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right side, the letters "second zone" appear from bottom to top. Move to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, and thus the first state is also set.

[Zone production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect B.
In the zone effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry into the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, it is an image in which the letters "first zone" that suggests the first zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestive image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the letters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2 the letters "first zone" move from left to right. To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which the letters "second zone" that suggests the second zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen by the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left side, the letters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right side, the letters "second zone" appear from bottom to top. Move to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, and thus the first state is also set.

[Zone production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect C.
In the zone effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry into the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, it is an image in which the letters "first zone" that suggests the first zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestive image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the letters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2 the letters "first zone" move from left to right. To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.
In addition, in the second zone entry suggestion effect, an accessory movable effect in which the third movable accessory 18 moves to the deployed position is performed. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 is arranged on the second zone entry suggestion image XD3, and as seen from the player, within the frame of the third movable accessory 18, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 and the decorative pattern 8L. , 8C, 8R change effects are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 and the character CRA are displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which the letters "second zone" that suggests the second zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen by the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left side, the letters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right side, the letters "second zone" appear from bottom to top. Move to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.

Moreover, in this second zone effect, the third movable accessory 18 is continuously arranged at the deployed position. The character CRA is displayed in the frame of the third movable accessory 18. Therefore, as seen from the player, the variation effect of the character CRA and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be visually recognized within the frame of the third movable accessory 18.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, and thus the first state is also set.

[Zone production D]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect D.
In the zone effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry into the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, it is an image in which the letters "first zone" that suggests the first zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestive image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the letters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2 the letters "first zone" move from left to right. To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer display XD5 is displayed. This timer display XD5 is displayed between the upper first zone suggestive image XD2 and the lower first zone suggestive image XD2, and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is changed by the countdown. Represents a timer that does. In the example of FIG. 96(D), the initial value of the timer display XD5 is 15 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value (for example, zero). The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the entry has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which the letters "second zone" that suggests the second zone are shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen by the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left side, the letters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right side, the letters "second zone" appear from bottom to top. Move to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, and thus the first state is also set.

In the zone effects A to D, other effects (other zone effects, etc.) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the zone effects A to D, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect. Therefore, during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect, naturally, the first zone effect is being performed.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of zone production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the second zone effects of the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first zone effect is also performed. That is, when the first zone effect is being performed, the second zone effect is also being performed. According to this configuration, the two zone effects are displayed at the same time, so that the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the zone effects A to D, in the second zone effect, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed when the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the two zone suggestive images are displayed at the same time, so that the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the zone effects A to D, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed after the first zone entry suggestion effect in which the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed after the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed, the player displays the first zone entry suggestion image XD1. At this point, it is possible to have an expectation for developing into the second zone effect, and as a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the zone effects A to D, the second zone effect is performed after the second zone intrusion suggestion effect in which the second zone inrush suggestion image XD3 is displayed. According to this configuration, the second zone effect is performed after the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. Therefore, when the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone entry image XD3 is displayed together with the first zone effect. Since it is determined that the second zone effect will be developed, as a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot by the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 of the first zone effect is displayed, the second zone entry suggestion effect in which the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed is performed. According to this configuration, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed GW, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, so that the player overlaps the first zone effect and the second zone effect. You can recognize that it will be carried out in the future, and you can have great expectations for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone effect is being performed, a timer display effect that displays the timer display XD5 is performed, and in the timer display effect, the timer value of the timer display XD5 is a predetermined value (for example, , Zero), the second zone effect (second zone entry suggestion effect) is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value while the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, it is possible to enter the second zone effect in which the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. When the timer display XD5 is displayed, the player greatly expects a rush to the second zone effect in addition to the first zone effect, and can have a great expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of zone production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are effects with the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the zone effects A to D, a plurality of effects are used. It may be carried out across changes (a plurality of changes in the special symbol). For example, in the zone effect D, the first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone effect, and the timer display effect are performed with a predetermined change, and the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed with the next change. May be.

[Modification 2]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 in the timer display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone entry effect are performed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first zone entry is performed. A timer display effect may be performed before the suggestion effect, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first zone entry suggestion effect and the first zone effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 in the timer display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second zone entry suggestion effect starts and then the second zone effect is performed, but the timer effect is not limited to this. When the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the display effect, the second zone effect may be performed without performing the second zone entry suggestion effect.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first zone effect,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, a first zone display indicating the first zone effect is performed in the first display effect, and a second zone indicating the second zone effect is performed in the second display effect. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-1 or aspect XD-2,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a first zone entry suggestion display suggesting entry into the first zone effect,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-3,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a second zone entry suggestion display that suggests entry into the second zone entry,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-5,
There is a case where a fifth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a timer display,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the fifth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the timer value of the timer display in the fifth display effect is a predetermined value, , The second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The cut-in effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. This cut-in effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the cut-in effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This cut-in effect is performed during one fluctuation of the special symbol (one fluctuation effect). It should be noted that the cut-in effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Cut-in effect A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect A.
In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of patterns, and the reach state is formed by changing the decorative pattern 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a strip shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the left side. In FIG. 97(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a strip shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the upper side. In FIG. 97(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a strip shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 97(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in effect B]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect B.
In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of patterns, and the reach state is formed by changing the decorative pattern 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 98(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the hip recess toward the upper side. In FIG. 98(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the diagonally lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be displayed from the diagonally right upper side, and may be displayed in the hip dip toward the diagonally left lower side. In FIG. 98(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in effect C]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect C.
In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of patterns, and the reach state is formed by changing the decorative pattern 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 99(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the hip recess toward the upper side. In FIG. 99(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. In addition, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and at the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2, the first cut-in display XE1 is arranged on the back side of the second cut-in display XE2. It Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the diagonally lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be displayed from the diagonally right upper side, and may be displayed in the hip dip toward the diagonally left lower side. In FIG. 99(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In addition, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed at a portion intersecting with the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in effect D]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect D.
In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of patterns, and the reach state is formed by changing the decorative pattern 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 100(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. Further, the character CRA is displayed on the first cut-in display XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed in the hip recess toward the upper side. In FIG. 100(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1. In addition, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and at the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2, the first cut-in display XE1 is arranged on the back side of the second cut-in display XE2. It Further, the character CRB is displayed on the second cut-in display XE2. The character CRA displayed in the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed, but is not limited to this, and may be displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a strip shape and an isosceles trapezoid shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the diagonally lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be displayed from the diagonally right upper side, and may be displayed in the hip dip toward the diagonally left lower side. In FIG. 100(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In addition, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed at a portion intersecting with the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. Further, the character CRC is displayed on the third cut-in display XE3. Although the characters CRA and CRB displayed in the second cut-in display XE2 and the third cut-in display XE3 are not displayed, the present invention is not limited to this and may be displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

In the cut-in effects A to D, other effects (such as other cut-in effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
In addition, after the cut-in effects A to D, a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect is performed. However, the cut-in effects A to D are performed at the final decision effect such as the super reach effect. Good.
The first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 in the cut-in effects A to D function as chance-up effects, and the more the cut-in display is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. It suggests.
In the cut-in effects A to D, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the same. However, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be different from each other. For example, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be as follows: first cut-in display XE1>second cut-in display XE2>third cut-in display XE3. However, the first cut-in display XE1<the second cut-in display XE2<the third cut-in display XE3.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of cut-in production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first cut-in effect XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect. To be done. According to this configuration, since the two cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy the continuous cut-in effects, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is performed from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player performs the continuous cut-in effect toward different positions, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is performed from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player performs the continuous cut-in effect from different positions, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in effect XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, then the second cut-in effect XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect, and then the third cut-in effect. In the in production, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the three cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy the three continuous cut-in effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is performed from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the diagonally upper right side to the diagonally lower left side. According to this configuration, the player performs the continuous cut-in effect toward the three different positions, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the above cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is performed from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the diagonally upper right side to the diagonally lower left side. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect because the continuous cut-in effect is executed from three different positions, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the cut-in effect.
[Modification 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine of the embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the start position and end of the cut-in display, respectively. The positions are different from each other, but not limited to this, the start position of the cut-in display may be the same and the end position may be different, or the start position of the cut-in display may be different and the end position may be the same. Alternatively, the start position and the end position of the cut-in display may be the same.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first cut-in display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second cut-in display,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the combination effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward the first position in the first display effect, and in the second display effect, a second cut-in display different from the first position. The second cut-in display is performed toward the position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effect, the first cut-in display is performed from the third position toward the first position in the first display effect, and the third position in the second display effect. The second cut-in display is performed from a fourth position different from
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a third cut-in display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward a fifth position different from the first position and the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-5,
In the combination effect, the third cut-in display is performed from the sixth position different from the third position and the fourth position to the fifth position in the third display effect. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variable display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104. This decorative symbol variation display effect is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), and is related to the variable display of the decorative symbol having the definite variation pattern and the non-definite variation pattern. Can be performed. More specifically, the decorative symbol variable display effect is an effect that is executed in association with the variable display of the decorative symbol that is integrally displayed with the character or the non-character.

[Decorative design variable display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variable display effect A.
In the decorative symbol variable display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In FIG. 101(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a decorative symbol variation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 101(A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are lost symbol arrays ( "689"). In this example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of the numbers 1 to 9, where odd numbers are probability variation symbols and even numbers are normal symbols. In other words, the jackpot symbol arrays “111”, “333”, “555”, “777”, and “999” are definite strange jackpots (“777” is a “16RV scheduled jackpot”, “333” is “16R (actual 15R) V”. Passing jackpot", "111", "555", "999" is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot"), jackpot symbol array "222", "444", "666", "888" is usually It is a big hit ("16R (actual 13R) V non-passing big hit").
In this decorative symbol variation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) numeral portion SB as a symbol, and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a pattern that is integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative design 8R, the probability variation design is displayed as a design in which a red (shown by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC simulating a flame are integrally displayed, and the numeral portion SR is displayed. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number portion SB of the normal symbol and the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 101(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as a confirmed symbol. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol confirmation effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state in the decorative symbol variable stop effect shown in FIG. 101(B) are completely stopped to become a fixed symbol, and the result of the fluctuation is determined by the player. Is a performance to notify. In this decorative design final production, the appearance of the display pattern of the right decorative design 8R stopped by the probability variation design is changed among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R stopped by the decorative design variation stop production shown in FIG. 101(B). It is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalizing effect shown in FIG. 101C are performed when the variation starts. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the probability variation pattern among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 101(C) is changed. The situation is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the decorative symbol final effect shown in FIG. 101C to the decorative symbol variation stop shown in FIG. 101B. The display mode of the effect is returned to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 101(A) described above. That is, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the variation starts, when the symbol array including the probability variation symbol is definitely displayed, the probability variation symbol is integrally displayed in the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC. The change is started after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the number portion SB after being changed to a different pattern. That is, immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probability variation pattern is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decorative pattern variable display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variable display effect B.
In the decorative symbol variable display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 102A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 102(A). In this example, "9↓9" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. As described above, "9" is a probability variation symbol, that is, in this reach effect, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the reach symbol array that is a probability variation jackpot is shown. In this reach effect, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R forming the reach design array are the red (hatched) numeral portion SR as a symbol and the non-character portion NC simulating a flame. And are displayed as a pattern that is integrally displayed, and the number portion SR is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102C, the reach symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reach symbol change effect, the display mode of the probability variation symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R) stopped in the reach symbol array (“9↓9”) is changed. That is, when the probability variation pattern in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed becomes the reach, the display mode is changed to the symbol in which the numeral portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a decorative symbol variation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative design variation stop production, by the state that the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R shown in FIG. 102(B) have been stopped in the reach design arrangement, the middle decorative design 8C of the final stop design is stopped. , The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has been stopped. In this example, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the probability variation symbol "7", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the lost symbol arrangement ("979", reach lost symbol arrangement). Here, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped at the design in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, while the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, which are stopped at the reach design arrangement, are When the decorative design 8C is stopped, the display mode is changed from the design in which the numeral portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed to the design in which the numerical portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, and The size of the section SR is enlarged, and the size of the section SR returns to the size at the time of the reach effect shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 102(D), in a state where all the decorative symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are symbols in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, The numeral portion SR has a display mode in which it is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC with substantially the same size as the numeral portion SB of the normal symbol. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 102(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as a confirmed symbol. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state in the decorative symbol variable stop effect shown in FIG. 102D completely stop and become a final symbol, and the result of the fluctuation is presented to the player. It is a performance to notify. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, a state in which the display mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative symbol variable stop effect shown in FIG. 102D is changed is shown. Since all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative symbol variation stop effect are the probability variation symbols, the display state of all the decorative symbols is changed in this decorative symbol finalization effect. That is, when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed on the probability variation pattern in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, the display mode is such that the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the numeral portion SR and the character portion CA9. The decorative pattern 8C changes into a pattern in which the numeral portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portions CA7 and CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalizing effect shown in FIG. 102E are performed when the variation starts. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, it is shown that the display mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 102(E) has changed. Since all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been fixedly stopped in the decorative symbol finalization effect are probability variation symbols, this decorative symbol variation start effect shows that the display modes of all the decorative symbols have changed. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the probability variation symbol in which the numeral portion SR and the character portions CA7 and CA9 are integrally displayed has a display mode in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed. The pattern changes. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the decorative symbol final effect shown in FIG. 102(E) to the decorative symbol variation stop shown in FIG. 102(D). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 102(A) described above. That is, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the variation starts, when the symbol array including the probability variation symbol is definitely displayed, the probability variation symbol is integrally displayed in the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC. The change is started after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the number portion SB after being changed to a different pattern. That is, immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probability variation pattern is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decorative pattern variable display effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variable display effect C.
In the decorative symbol variable display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In FIG. 103(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a decorative symbol variation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103(A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are lost symbol arrays ( “689”). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probability variation symbol.
In this decorative symbol variation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) numeral portion SB as a symbol, and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a pattern that is integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative design 8R, the probability variation design is displayed as a design in which a red (shown by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC simulating a flame are integrally displayed, and the numeral portion SR is displayed. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number portion SB of the normal symbol and the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 103(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as a confirmed symbol. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol confirmation effect, the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped to become a definite symbol, and the result of the variation is the player. Is a performance to notify. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped by the probability variation symbol is changed among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped by the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103(B). It is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalizing effect shown in FIG. 103C are started. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the probability variation pattern changes among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 103(C). The situation is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the decorative symbol final effect shown in FIG. 103C to the decorative symbol variation stop shown in FIG. 103B. It returns to the display mode of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 103(A) described above. That is, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the variation starts, when the symbol array including the probability variation symbol is definitely displayed, the probability variation symbol is integrally displayed in the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC. The change is started after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the number portion SB after being changed to a different pattern. That is, immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probability variation pattern is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative design enlargement stop effect shows that the variable display of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103(E) has stopped, and here, the decorative design 8L, It shows that 8C and 8R stopped at the lost symbol array (“678”). This decorative symbol expansion stop effect is an effect similar to the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 103(B), except that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop the normal symbol, and The probability variation pattern is stopped in the decorative pattern 8C. Here, when the probability variation pattern stops in the middle decorative symbol 8C, compared to the case where the probability variation symbol stops in the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. 103(B), the numerical portion SR of the probability variation symbol is the normal symbol. It is designed to be displayed larger than the numeral portion SB. That is, when the final stop symbol (medium decorative symbol 8C) is stopped with the probability variation symbol, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol 8L), the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped with the probability variation symbol The number portion SR is displayed large. In this case, the numeral portion SR is displayed so that a part thereof is out of the display area of the non-character portion NC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol finalizing effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state by the decorative symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. It is a performance to notify. In this decorative design final production, the display mode of the middle decorative design 8C stopped by the probability variation design among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R stopped by the decorative design expansion stop production shown in FIG. 103(F) is changed. It is shown. That is, the probability variation design in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the numerical portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA7 with a size substantially half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "7".
[Decorative design variable display effect D]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variable display effect D.
In the decorative symbol variable display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. In FIG. 104(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a decorative symbol variation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104(A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are lost symbol arrays ( "689"). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probability variation symbol.
In this decorative symbol variation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) numeral portion SB as a symbol, and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a pattern that is integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative design 8R, the probability variation design is displayed as a design in which a red (shown by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC simulating a flame are integrally displayed, and the numeral portion SR is displayed. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number portion SB of the normal symbol and the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as a confirmed symbol. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a stop symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this stop symbol change effect, the display pattern of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped by the probability variation symbol among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped by the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B) is changed. It is shown. That is, the probability variation symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the stop symbol change effect is performed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. In the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and the fluctuations as a final symbol. It does not show the result of. The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation pattern "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), the pseudo continuous start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This pseudo continuous start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped by the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104C are started.
Here, the pseudo-relational effect is an effect in which the variable display of the decorative symbols appears to be repeated a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the change, during the reach effect, when the change is stopped, or the like. For example, the pseudo continuous production is a production that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping all of the decorative designs after the variation of the decorative design is started, an effect of repeating the production of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined design array of the decorative designs, Effects that repeat the effect of temporarily stopping the determined logo (for example, NEXT), or display that causes a variation of the decorative design along with a display that reminds of a pseudo-relation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo" including. It should be noted that the number of times of effect to be repeated is also referred to as a pseudo continuous number, and if it is two times, the notation such as "pseudo 2", "x2", and if it is three times, "pseudo 3", "x3" can be made.
In this pseudo continuous start effect, of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104(C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the probability variation pattern has changed. The situation is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the numeral portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed when the pseudo-relation start effect is performed. To do. At this time, the size of the numeral portion SR is enlarged, and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the numeral portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the pseudo-relation start production is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104(C) to the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B). The display mode is returned to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pseudo continuous variation effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A) described above is performed. That is, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the pseudo array variation is started and the symbol array including the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed, the probability variation symbol is integrated with the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC. After changing to the displayed symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR to change it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the re-variation is started. That is, the display mode of the probability variation symbol is changed to the display mode at the time of the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B) immediately before the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this way, the display mode when the pseudo continuous production shown in FIGS. 104(A) to (E) in the decorative symbol variable display effect D is performed is as shown in FIG. 101(A) in the decorative symbol variable display effect A described above. The display modes are similar to those of the variable effect of the decorative pattern that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-relational effect is not performed as shown in (E) to (E). As a result, even if the pseudo-representation is performed, a delicate and delicate pseudo-representation that makes the player appear as if the variable display of the decorative design (special design) was actually performed multiple times Can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. That is, in this example, the reach effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive number of times is performed twice. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array in the pseudo continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 104(E). In this example, "9↓9" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. As described above, “9” is a probability variation symbol, that is, in this reach effect, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the reach symbol array is a probability variation jackpot. The decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot symbol expansion stop effect is a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 104(F) have been stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, and the final decorative symbol medium decorative symbol 8C is stopped. , The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has been stopped. In this example, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the probability variation symbol "9", and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the probability variation jackpot symbol array "999". Here, in this jackpot design expansion stop production, when the decoration pattern 8C of the final stop design stops at the probability variation pattern and the probability variation jackpot design array is displayed, all of the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are of the probability variation design. The numeral portion SR is enlarged and displayed larger than the numeral portion SB of the normal symbol. In other words, the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol is enlarged and displayed larger than the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol shown in FIGS. 104(B), (D) and (F). Further, in this case, the numerical portion SR is displayed by partially protruding from the display area of the non-character portion NC. In addition, in the jackpot symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and the fluctuation as a final symbol. It does not show the result of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect, decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state in the jackpot pattern expansion stop effect shown in FIG. It is a production that notifies the player that it has become. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R as the probability variation symbols stopped in the jackpot symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 104(G) are all displayed in different display modes. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed when the jackpot confirmation effect is performed. .. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size almost half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variable display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group, and when the jackpot is achieved with the decorative symbol of the first symbol group. , The bonus given to the player is set to be more advantageous than when the jackpot is awarded with the decorative symbols of the second symbol group, and the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are the first symbol and the character that are integrally displayed. It is an aspect symbol, the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, and as one of a plurality of display effects, the first symbol group The decorative design may be displayed in the third mode design in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group in which the privilege to be given to the player is advantageously set is displayed at the predetermined timing by changing the first symbol to the third symbol and displaying it as the third symbol. It is also possible to give an impression to the player, and change the variable display of the decorative pattern to give the player a feeling of big hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol in relation to the start of variation, and are involved in the variation stop. It is configured to change from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol. Further, the first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is displayed the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. It is configured to According to this configuration, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a display mode in which the symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, which is similar to the decorative symbol of the second symbol group, while the movement is fast, and One symbol is also displayed in the same or larger size as the second symbol. As a result, even if the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changing, the player can easily visually recognize the trend of the first symbol, which has the highest interest and is directly connected to the privilege grant. On the other hand, during the fluctuation stop without movement, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is different from the decorative symbol of the second symbol group in the display mode in which the symbol and the character are integrally displayed, and the first symbol is also the first symbol. It will be displayed smaller than two symbols. As a result, the first symbol is displayed small and the character is closed up while the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are stopped fluctuating, and the player is the first symbol of the first symbol group of the highest interest that is directly connected to the privilege grant. It becomes possible to carefully visually recognize and note the character associated with. That is, the player can grasp the first symbol only by looking at the character. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the decorative symbol includes the decorative symbol of the first symbol group when the decorative symbol stops changing in a predetermined symbol arrangement, once, When the decorative design of the first design group is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third mode design, and then the decorative design is determined by the stopped (provisionally stopped) design array, the decorative design of the first design group is set. It is configured to change from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol. After that, when the variation of the decorative symbol of the decided symbol array is started, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is configured to be changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol. According to this configuration, the player, when the decorative symbols include the decorative symbols of the first symbol group when the decorative symbols stop fluctuating in the predetermined symbol array, the first symbol group in the predetermined symbol array that fluctuates and stops. The first symbol can be easily confirmed, and the character associated with the first symbol in the determined predetermined symbol arrangement can be easily confirmed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stop in the reach symbol array, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stopped in the reach symbol array are When changing from one aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol, and then the final stop symbol stops and fluctuates to stop in a predetermined symbol arrangement (temporary stop), the decorative symbols of the first symbol group from the third aspect symbol to the first symbol Change to the mode design. Next, when the decorative design is fixed (temporarily stopped) by the fixed design sequence, the decorative design of the first design group is changed from the third mode design to the first mode design, and then the determined design sequence is changed. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is configured to be changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped in the reach symbol array, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is displayed in the third mode symbol instead of the first mode symbol, thereby playing the game. It is possible to improve the expectation of the jackpot of the relevant person. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, when the final stop symbol stops at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, or at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, the jackpot symbol array (probability change) When the jackpot pattern arrangement) is displayed, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are displayed integrally with the non-character by changing (enlarging) the size of the first symbol (a part from the non-character display area is displayed). It is configured to be displayed in the fourth mode symbol (displayed by protruding). According to this configuration, when the final stop symbol and the jackpot symbol array (probable variation jackpot symbol array), which are the most interesting and are directly related to the privilege grant, are the decorative symbols of the first symbol group, the size of the first symbol is changed (enlarged). ) Is displayed, it is possible to change the variable display of the decorative pattern, thereby improving the player's expectation. Further, the player can easily confirm the decorative symbol of the first symbol group and grasp the variation result. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the decorative symbol starts the pseudo continuous variation, when the symbol array including the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped and displayed, its After changing the decorative design of the one design group to the third mode design, and after enlarging the first symbol, the re-variation is started. According to this configuration, the display mode when the pseudo-relational effect is performed is the same as the display mode similar to the actual fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-reciprocal effect is not performed. As a result, even if a pseudo-relational effect is performed, a subtle and delicate pseudo-representative effect that makes it appear to the player as if the variable display of the decorative pattern (special symbol) was performed multiple times realistically. Can be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative symbol variable display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol), the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol), the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) in the decorative symbol. In any case, when the variable stopped symbol is a probability variable symbol, once the symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed as a symbol (temporary stop), the symbol and the symbol are integrally displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the final stop design (medium decoration design) may be changed to a design in which a number and a character are integrally displayed. The final stop design (medium decoration design) is the design that is most interesting to the player, for example, in the reach state, so that the interest of the game can be improved by changing the display mode in this way.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, odd numbers are probability variation symbols, even numbers are regular symbols, probability variation symbols are red, normal symbols are blue, and numbers as symbols are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol may be a character other than a number, a mark, or an image (icon) of an object or article having a specific shape. Further, in the probability variation pattern, the characters that are integrally displayed with the numbers are displayed in the same size, but the probability variation pattern in which the privilege to be given to the player at the time of a big hit is advantageous (for example, "3", "7"). ) May display the character larger than other probability variation patterns.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the final stop symbol (medium decorative symbol) is stopped with a probability variation symbol, the probability variation symbol is a non-character by changing (enlarging) the number size. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the bonus given to the player at the time of a big hit is stopped with an advantageous probability variation pattern (for example, "3", "7"), the size of the numbers of the probability variation pattern may be changed (enlarged). Good. In this case, the probability variation pattern may be only when the final stop design (medium decoration design), or when the probability variation design is the first stop design (left decoration design) or the second stop design (right decoration design) May be Alternatively, when the final stop design (medium decoration design) is stopped with a probability variation design, the probability variation design does not change in the size of the numbers, and the first stop design (left decoration design) and the second stop are stopped. You may make it reduce the number of the design (right decoration design).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when a jackpot pattern array (probability variation jackpot pattern array) is displayed with a probability variation pattern, the probability variation pattern is changed (enlarged) in size of numbers. It was designed to be displayed integrally with the non-character (a part of the non-character is displayed outside the display area), but in this case, in the reach state before the jackpot symbol array (probable variation jackpot symbol array) is displayed, You may make it enlarge and display the number of the probability variation design which becomes a big hit among the final stop designs which are changing. Alternatively, all the numbers of the probability variation symbols of the changing final stop symbol may be enlarged and displayed, or all the numbers of the final stop symbol may be enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the variable stopped symbol is a probability variation symbol, the symbol and the non-character are temporarily stopped as a symbol (temporary stop). After that, the number and the character are changed to a design in which they are integrally displayed. In this case, when the number and the character are changed to a design in which they are integrally displayed, when the character is in a predetermined display mode ( For example, the color of the character may change to red, the face of the character may change to a smile), and subsequent changes (including re-changes such as pseudo-relation) may be reached or a big hit. That is, the reach or the jackpot may be suggested by changing the character to a predetermined display mode.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, in the pseudo continuous effect, the number and the character portion are once displayed integrally in the probability variation pattern in which the number and the non-character are integrally displayed and temporarily stopped. After changing to a design, and then returning to the design in which the numbers and the non-characters are integrally displayed and changing again (hereinafter, also referred to as a first pseudo continuous production), the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the pseudo continuous production, a probability variation pattern in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed and is temporarily stopped does not change to a pattern in which numbers and a character part are integrally displayed, and is changed again as it is (hereinafter, the first (Also referred to as "2 pseudo continuous production"). Then, in this case, when the first pseudo-relational production is performed, the reach or the jackpot is achieved by the subsequent re-variation, and when the second pseudo-reproduction is performed, the reach is non-reach by the subsequent re-variation. You may In other words, the reach or the big hit may be suggested by performing the first pseudo continuous production.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols,
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols in accordance with variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The decorative design has a first design group and a second design group,
When the jackpot in the decorative pattern of the first symbol group is a big hit, the privilege to be given to the player is set to be more advantageous than when the jackpot is hit in the decorative symbol of the second symbol group,
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first decorative symbol effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
The first decorative symbol production may display a decorative symbol of the first symbol group in a third aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D3-2]
The first decorative symbol production, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, from the first aspect symbol is changed to the third aspect symbol in relation to the start of variation, and from the third aspect symbol in relation to stop of variation Change to the first aspect design,
The gaming machine described in Aspect D3-1.
[Aspect D3-3]
The first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
[Aspect D3-4]
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols,
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols in accordance with variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The decorative design has a first design group and a second design group,
When the jackpot in the decorative pattern of the first symbol group is a big hit, the privilege to be given to the player is set to be more advantageous than when the jackpot is hit in the decorative symbol of the second symbol group,
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means can execute a predetermined second decorative symbol effect as one effect of the plurality of display effects.
The second decorative symbol effect may display the decorative symbol of the first symbol group in a fourth mode symbol in which the size of the first symbol is changed and the non-character is integrally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D3-5]
The decorative design of the first design group is a probability variation design, the decorative design of the second design group is a non-probability design, the first symbol and the second symbol are numbers, and the numbers of the first symbols and The numbers of the second symbols have different colors,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4.

The game state suggesting effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. This game state suggesting effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the end of the time saving game performed after the jackpot game, and more specifically, when the predetermined condition is established after the time saving game is over, the game state is low probability. It is a production that suggests whether it is (normal state) or high accuracy (latency invariant state).

[Game state suggestion production A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestive effect A.
In the game state suggesting effect A, although not shown, the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and scrolling downward is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In addition, the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state until the gaming state hits the next time. ) Is a big hit. The jackpot pattern array "333" is a "16R (actual 15R) V passing planned jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game is finished, the highly accurate short time state (highly accurate high base state) until the next jackpot in the gaming state It is a big hit. The jackpot patterns other than "777" and "333" are "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent probability jackpot) or "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot) Is. "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent probability jackpot), after the jackpot game is finished, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate time-shortened state (highly accurate high base state) until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is made 100 times. , After that, it becomes a high-accuracy low base state (latent latency change state). "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot), after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state becomes a low-probability time-short state (low-probability high-base state) until the number of special symbol fluctuations is 100 times. , After that, it becomes a low accurate low base state (normal state).
In the jackpot finalization effect shown in FIG. 105(A), the jackpot symbol array "555" is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array is "555", "16R (substantial 13R) V passing big jackpot" (latent probability jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot) ), the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and on the display screen 7a, although not shown, an effect relating to this jackpot game is executed. Then, when this jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving start effect, the decorative symbol variation effect in the high-accuracy high-base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high accuracy state even though the time saving state can be recognized. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is the low-probability/high-base state or the high-probability/high-base state. In addition, in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time saving number display ZT showing the remaining number of time saving times is displayed, and here, the time saving number display ZT has started the fluctuation of the first special symbol after shifting to the time saving state. Since it is the case (when the number of shortened working hours has not been digested even once), "100" is shown as the default value.

Next, after the time saving start effect is executed, the time saving game is started, and when the special symbol is changed 100 times in this time saving game, that is, when the jackpot is not a big hit during the time saving game period. As shown in FIG. 105(C), a time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead of displaying the character "time saving end" in the center of the display screen 7a, "0" is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a variation effect at the time saving end is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving variation effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, at a variation time longer than that during the time saving game. Further, on the display screen 7a, a specific image KSG1 having a motif of "mountain" is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image KSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, after the time saving game is over (after the time saving end time variation effect is performed), the variation display of the special symbol is performed once, and as shown in FIG. 105(E), the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the game state suggesting effect A, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is finished, the current game state using the specific image KSG1 is low probability (normal state) or high accuracy ( The latent probability change state) is used to perform the latent probability change suggestive effect described later. In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105(E), since the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is over, the variation display of the special symbol is 9 times remaining until the latent probability variation suggestion effect. The number "9" shown is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (missing symbol) every time the variable display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is over, until the latent probability variation suggestive effect. A number indicating the countdown is displayed large in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the number indicating the countdown until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific image KSG1 is once deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a countdown time variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time variation effect, the display is switched to a number indicating the countdown up to the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. At this time, the specific image KSG1 that has been once deleted by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105(E) is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown effect and the countdown time variable effect are alternately repeated, and after the time saving game is finished, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times, then, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the display screen. In 7a, a countdown effect is displayed in which the number "0" indicating that the variation display of the special symbol remains 0 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105(G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has been completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), the latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability variation suggestion effect, when the current game state is high accuracy (latent probability variation state), the color of the specific image KSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red) and low probability (normal state). At this time, by not changing the color of the specific image KSG1, an effect is suggested that indicates whether the current game state is low-accuracy (normal state) or high-accuracy (latent latency change state). In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 105(A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally set as the latent probability jackpot, so in the latent probability variation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 105(H), FIG. ), the white specific image KSG1 shown in (F) is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current game state is highly accurate (latent latency change state). If the jackpot pattern array "555" is a normal jackpot internally, in the latent probability change suggestive effect shown in FIG. 105(H), the white specific image shown in FIGS. 105(D) and (F) is displayed. KSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state).

[Game state suggestion production B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestive effect B.
In the game state suggesting effect B, although not shown, the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and scrolling downward is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In addition, the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106(A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is "555". Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array is "555", "16R (substantial 13R) V passing big jackpot" (latent probability jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot) ), the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and on the display screen 7a, although not shown, an effect relating to this jackpot game is executed. Then, when this jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving start effect, the decorative symbol variation effect in the high-accuracy high-base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high accuracy state even though the time saving state can be recognized. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is the low-probability/high-base state or the high-probability/high-base state. In addition, in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time saving number display ZT showing the remaining number of time saving times is displayed, and here, the time saving number display ZT has started the fluctuation of the first special symbol after shifting to the time saving state. Since it is the case (when the number of shortened working hours has not been digested even once), "100" is shown as the default value. Further, in the upper left of the display screen 7a, it is shown that the effect mode performed from the time saving start effect is the mode A. Mode A is an effect using a "mountain" as a motif, and in this time saving start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific image simulating the "mountain" below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. KSG1 is displayed.

Next, after the time saving start effect is executed, the time saving game is started, and when the special symbol is changed 50 times in this time saving game, the effect mode is changed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 106(C). The performance is executed. This effect mode change effect is an effect for changing the effect mode from the mode A to the mode B, and the effect using the "mountain" motif in the mode A is changed to the effect using the "tree" motif in the mode B. .. That is, mode B is an effect with a "tree" motif, which is performed when the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) since the time-saving game is started, and this effect mode change effect Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image RSG1 imitating "tree" is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in place of the specific image KSG1. The specific image RSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, when the special symbol changes 100 times in the time-saving game (50 variations of the special symbol from the effect mode change effect), that is, when the jackpot is not a big hit during the time-saving game, the figure As shown in 106(D), the time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead of displaying the character "time saving end" in the center of the display screen 7a, "0" is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a variation effect at the time saving end is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving variation effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, at a variation time longer than that during the time saving game. In addition, the mode B is maintained in the effect mode, and the specific image RSG1 imitating "tree" is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as in the time saving game.

Next, after the time saving game ends (after the time saving end time fluctuation effect is performed), when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed once, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the game state suggesting effect B, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is finished, the current game state using the specific image RSG1 is low probability (normal state) or high accuracy ( The latent probability change state) is used to perform the latent probability change suggestive effect described later. In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106(F), since the variation display of the special symbol has been performed once after the time saving game has ended, the variation display of the special symbol remains 9 times until the latent probability variation suggestion effect. The number "9" shown is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (missing symbol) every time the variable display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is over, until the latent probability variation suggestive effect. A number indicating the countdown is displayed large in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the numbers indicating the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect are displayed, and the specific image RSG1 is once deleted.

Next, although illustration is omitted here, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the countdown variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time variation effect, the display is switched to a number indicating the countdown up to the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106(F), and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image RSG1 that has been once deleted by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106F is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown effect and the countdown time variable effect are alternately repeated, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is finished, then, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the display screen. In 7a, a countdown effect is displayed in which the number "0" indicating that the variation display of the special symbol remains 0 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106(G) indicates that the countdown up to the latent probability change suggestion effect has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), the latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability variation suggestion effect, when the current game state is high probability (latent latency variation state), the color of the specific image RSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red), and low probability (normal state) At this time, by not changing the color of the specific image RSG1, an effect that suggests whether the current game state is low accuracy (normal state) or high accuracy (latent latency change state) is performed. In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 106(A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally set as the latent probability jackpot. Therefore, in the latent probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106(H), FIG. ), the white specific image RSG1 shown in (E) is changed to the red specific image RSG2, which suggests that the current game state is highly accurate (latency invariant state). If the jackpot pattern array “555” is a normal jackpot internally, in the latent probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106(H), the white specific image shown in FIGS. 106(C) and (E) is displayed. RSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state).

[Game state suggestion production C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestive effect C.
In the game state suggestion effect C, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and scrolling downward is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In addition, the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107(A), the jackpot symbol array "555" is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array is "555", "16R (substantial 13R) V passing big jackpot" (latent probability jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot) ), the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot game production, the characters "big jackpot game start!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7, and the jackpot symbol array OZH ("555") which has been a jackpot this time is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. In the jackpot game production, productions such as an opening production, a round production, and an ending production are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the selected image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This selection image display effect is an effect performed as one of the jackpot game effects that is performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, is performed during the round effect), and a plurality of selected images SG1 on the display screen 7a, SG2, SG3 and SG4 are displayed. The selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images that include the characters "CHANGE" in the display area. The selected image SG1 is red, the selected image SG2 is green, the selected image SG1 is yellow, and the selected image SG1 is blue. Is displayed. Here, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4 are images that suggest the gaming state after the jackpot game, and more specifically, the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be a certain change (high accuracy) state. This is a suggestive image. The magnitude of this degree of expectation is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG4 (blue) (for example, a gaming state after a jackpot game) The probability of the probability changing (high accuracy) state is selected image SG1:80%, selected image SG2:60%, selected image SG3:40%>selected image SG4:20%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this button effect, an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4 shown in FIG. 107(C) are once deleted, the button image BOG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the “button PUSH! Character is displayed. A meter MAT indicating the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower collar portion of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a game state suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggestion effect is an effect in which any one of the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4 is displayed as a result of the player depressing the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63. In addition, here, it is shown that the selection image SG1 (red) is selected and displayed based on the fact that the latent likelihood jackpot is internally generated (the probability is changed or the latent likelihood jackpot is internally generated. If so, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG4 (blue), and is internally normal (low accuracy). When it is a big hit, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG4 (blue)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG1 (red)).

After that, the jackpot game ends, and although illustration is omitted, similar to FIGS. 105(B) to (G), on the display screen 7a, a time saving start effect, a time saving end effect, a time saving end variation effect, a countdown effect, a countdown are performed. Time-varying effects and countdown effects are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), on the display screen 7a, the latent probability variation suggestion similar to that in FIG. 105(H) is executed. That is, the white specific image KSG1 is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is highly accurate (latent probability variation state). That is, in the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 107(E), when the selection image SG1 (red) with the highest expectation that the game state after the big hit game is the probable change (high probability) state is selected, Like the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in 107(F), the probability that an effect suggesting that the current game state is highly accurate (latency probability change state) is increased.

On the other hand, in the game state suggesting effect, it is assumed that the selection image SG4 (blue) is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 107(G) instead of FIG. 107(E) (however, in this case, The jackpot pattern array "555" that was done was assumed to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot)).

After that, the jackpot game ends, and although illustration is omitted, similar to FIGS. 105(B) to (G), on the display screen 7a, a time saving start effect, a time saving end effect, a time saving end variation effect, a countdown effect, a countdown are performed. Time-varying effects and countdown effects are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), on the display screen 7a, the latent specific variation suggestion effect in which the white specific image KSG1 is not changed to the red specific image KSG2 and the specific image KSG1 is kept white Is executed. That is, the latent probability variation suggesting effect is suggested, which suggests that the current game state is in a low probability (normal state). That is, in the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 107(G), when the selection image SG4 (blue) with the lowest degree of expectation that the game state after the big hit game is a positive change (high accuracy) state is selected, Like the latent probability variation suggestion effect shown in 107(H), the probability that an effect suggesting that the current game state is low probability (normal state) is executed is high.

[Game state suggestion production D]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestive effect D.
In the game state suggestion effect D, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and scrolling downward is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In addition, the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 108(A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is "555". Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array is "555", "16R (substantial 13R) V passing big jackpot" (latent probability jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot) ), the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, the jackpot game is started, and although not shown on the display screen 7a, the jackpot game effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 107(B). In this jackpot game effect, effects such as an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a character selection effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character selection effect is an effect that is performed during the jackpot game (for example, is performed during the round effect) and is executed as one of the jackpot game effects, and a plurality of selected characters are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. In this example, two selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed as selected characters. As shown in FIG. 108(B), regarding the selected characters CRA and CRB, the selected character CRA is displayed in the left half display area of the screen, and the selected character CRB is displayed in the right half display area of the screen. Characters suggesting the operating method of the effect button 63 are displayed above the selected characters CRA and CRB. The characters "one blow" are displayed on the selected character CRA and the characters "continuous hits" are displayed on the selected character CRB. ing. Furthermore, a character indicating the name of the character is displayed below the selected characters CRA and CRB, the character "OARO" is displayed on the selected character CRA, and the character "JARO" is displayed on the selected character CRB. When this character selection effect is executed, the player operates the select button 68 to select either the selected character CRA or CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a character determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character determination effect, the character selected by the player in the character selection effect is displayed, and here, the selected character CRA is selected and displayed. That is, in the character determination effect, among the selected characters CRA and CRB displayed in the character selection effect, the unselected selected character CRB is erased from the display screen 7a, and the selected selected character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a. Displayed in the center. The display screen 7a also displays the characters "Ichiba" and "OARO" together with the selected character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRA displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. In other words, this button effect causes the player to press the effect button 63 once, due to "one blow" that suggests the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRA. Specifically, the button image BOG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "button PUSH!" is displayed above the button image BOG. A meter MAT indicating the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower collar portion of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a game state suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the game state suggesting effect, as a result of the player depressing the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63, an image indicating the game state after the jackpot game is displayed. More specifically, it is an image that suggests the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a certain change (high accuracy) state. In this example, the image suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game is the expectation suggesting image KSG1 which is displayed in red in the display area and includes the characters "CHANGE". Here, the expectation suggesting image is an expectation suggesting image KSG2 displayed in green, the expectation suggesting image KSG3 displayed in yellow, and an expectation suggesting image displayed in blue. Four types of KSG4 are prepared. The degree of expectation is in the order of expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red)> expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue) (for example, , The probability that the game state after the jackpot game is a certain change (high accuracy) state is as follows: expectation suggestion image KSG1:80%, expectation suggestion image KSG2:60%, expectation suggestion image KSG3:40%> expectation suggestion image KSG 4: 20%). It should be noted that the expectation degree suggesting image KSG1 (red) is selected in this game state suggesting production because it is an internal probability jackpot (internal variation or latent accuracy jackpot). If so, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of the expectation suggestive image KSG1 (red)> the expectation suggesting image KSG2 (green)> the expectation suggesting image KSG3 (yellow)> the expectation suggesting image KSG4 (blue), When the internal normal (low probability) jackpot is selected, the magnitude of the selection probability is as follows: expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue)> expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> The order of the degree of expectation image KSG1 (red)).

On the other hand, in the character determination effect, it is assumed that the selected character CRB is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 108(F) instead of FIG. It is assumed that "555" was "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing big hit" (normal big hit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRB displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. In other words, this button effect causes the player to continuously hit the effect button 63 due to the "continuous hit" that suggests the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRB. Specifically, a plurality of button images BOG and the letters "PUSH" are repeatedly displayed on the display screen 7a while changing the display position, overlapping the button images BOG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), a game state suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggesting effect is similar to that of FIG. 108(E), and as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, an image indicating the game state after the jackpot game is displayed. In the present example, the image indicating the gaming state after the jackpot game is the expectation suggesting image KSG4 displayed in blue including the characters "CHANGE" in the display area. Note that the expectation degree suggesting image KSG4 (blue) is selected in this game state suggesting production because it is a normal big hit internally.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of game state suggestion production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the time saving game has a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state). There is, and when the time saving game is over, in low accuracy time saving, the game state becomes a normal state of low accuracy low base, and in high accuracy time saving, the game state apparently is difficult to distinguish from the normal state. When it becomes a high-accuracy low-based latency probability variation state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is over, it is configured to perform a game state suggestion suggesting whether the current game state is the normal state or the latency probability variation state. Has become. According to this configuration, the player can determine whether the current game state is low-accuracy (normal state) or high-accuracy (latency confirmation change state) when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is over. it can. Thereby, the player can enter the game with great joy when there is a high probability (probability of latent change) in the game state suggesting effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the time saving game is completed. Yes, until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time saving game ends, it is configured to perform a countdown display for each variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, the player can easily understand how many times the variation display of the special symbol is executed after the time saving game is finished and the game state suggesting effect is performed. In addition, this countdown display (particularly, the countdown display immediately before the game state suggestion effect is performed) can give the player an excitement or excitement as to whether or not there is a probability change, and the player can also provide the game state suggestion effect. It is possible to effectively prevent overlooking. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a specific image that changes according to the effect mode is displayed, and the game state suggesting effect is when the game state is the normal state and when the latent latency variation state is present. Then, by changing the display mode of the specific image, it is configured to suggest whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variation state. According to this configuration, the player can very easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent latency change state by merely recognizing that the display mode of the specific image has changed. Further, since the specific image changes according to the effect mode, it is possible to perform the game state suggesting effect that matches (harmonizes) with the effect mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, during execution of the jackpot game, a plurality of selection images suggesting a gaming state after the jackpot game are displayed and selected from the plurality of selection images. The selection image indicates the expectation of the gaming state after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can predict the gaming state after the big hit game during the big hit game. Also, when it is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is highly accurate, the player can enter the game with great joy. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, a player has an effect button that can be operated to display a plurality of characters that the player can select during execution of the jackpot game. Depending on the character selected from, the effect buttons are operated differently, and the game state after the jackpot game is suggested after the button effects are finished. According to this configuration, the player can operate different effect buttons depending on the selected character. In addition, the player can expect a suggestion of a game state after the jackpot game, which is performed by selecting a character capable of operating the production button which he is good at. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modified example of the game state suggesting effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the specific image is displayed after the end of the time saving or after the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be continuously displayed in all game states. Further, the specific image is automatically changed according to the effect mode, but the player may select the effect mode so that the player can select a desired specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the game state suggesting effect is that the predetermined symbol is satisfied and the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times after the time saving game is finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed after the time saving game has ended, when a prize has been won in a predetermined winning opening (a predetermined number of prizes) after the time saving game has ended, or the time saving game has ended. It may be when a predetermined effect (including reach) is performed after that, or when the variable display of symbols other than the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, a countdown display is performed for each variation of the special symbol until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time saving game ends. Although the game state suggestion production is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display may be a countup display. Further, the countdown display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, the countdown display may be displayed off the display screen. By doing so, it is possible to perform a powerful countdown display and further appeal to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the game state suggesting effect is configured to suggest whether or not the current game state is a positive change by changing the color of the specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the game state suggesting effect, the design of the specific image is changed to a different design, or the specific image is changed to a stereoscopic image (3D), thereby suggesting whether or not the current game state is probable. May be. Alternatively, whether or not the current game state is probable may be suggested by the color and size of the countdown display, that is, the display mode of the countdown display. Further, in the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed on the lower center side of the display screen 7a, but the display position of the specific image may be arbitrary, and the display position of the specific image may change or the specific image may change. May be moved. Further, the high-probability suggestion by the specific image may be continued until the next big hit, or may be continued until the number of special figure fluctuations thereafter reaches a predetermined number.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the effect mode is exemplified by the motif of “mountain” or “tree”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be one in which various characters are used as motifs. In this case, the specific image that changes according to the effect mode may be displayed as a character image.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a plurality of selection images are displayed during execution of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game, the selected image is selected from the plurality through the button effect. Although the state is suggested, in this case, a plurality of selection images may be sequentially lighted and displayed, and the lighted selection image may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. Alternatively, a plurality of selected images may be displayed in a rotating manner, and the selected image at the selected position may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player himself to perform technical intervention to select the selection image desired by the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the expectation suggestion image displayed (selected) in the game state suggestion effect during the execution of the jackpot game is an internal jackpot type (the jackpot changes with certainty). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image is a button effect that is performed immediately before the game state suggestion effect, and whether or not the player has operated the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction (whether the operation instruction of the operation button 63 of the player has been operated). Achievement level (hereinafter also referred to as “button operation achievement level”). Alternatively, the expectation suggestive image may be determined in consideration of the internal jackpot type and the degree of the player's button operation achievement in the button effect. In this way, the player can technically intervene by himself or herself to display an expectation degree suggesting image with a higher expectation degree. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player selects either the selected character CRA or CRB in the character selection effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character selection effect, you may select from three or more characters. Further, when a character is selected in the character selection effect, a predetermined dialogue may be displayed or uttered, and the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the type of the displayed or uttered dialogue.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the selected image display effect, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4 are displayed, but the number and display position of the selected images are not particularly limited. It is not a thing and may be arbitrary. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, five button images BOG are displayed in the button effect, but the number of button images BOG is not particularly limited and may be arbitrary.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 107, the time saving game is started when the jackpot game is finished, and when the special symbol is changed (time saving number) 100 times in this time saving game, the time saving game is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of times saved is reached a predetermined number (for example, 30 or 50 times), an effect (for example, battle effect) as to whether or not to increase the number of times saved by a predetermined number (for example, 20 times) may be performed. Good. Alternatively, when the number of times saved is reached a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, battle effect) as to whether or not the number of times saved is continued until the next big hit may be performed. Furthermore, when the number of time saving times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, battle effect) as to whether or not the confirmation of the probability change confirmation is suggested may be performed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols,
When the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display means are jackpot symbols, jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game,
A time saving game changing means for changing the game state after the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time saving game,
A gaming machine equipped with,
In the time saving game, the probability of becoming the jackpot has a low probability time that is a normal first probability and a high probability time that is a second probability higher than the first probability.
When the time saving game ends, in the low accuracy time saving, the game state becomes a low accuracy low base normal state, and in the high accuracy time saving, the game state apparently hides a probability change that is difficult to distinguish from the normal state. It becomes a high-accuracy low-base latent probability change state,
The display means can execute a first effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The first effect display, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is finished, performs a game state suggesting effect that indicates whether the current game state is a normal state or a latent latency change state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-2]
The establishment of the predetermined condition is when the symbol display is performed a predetermined number of times by the symbol display means,
The display means can execute a second effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The second effect display performs a countdown display for each variation of the symbol until the variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number after the time saving game is finished,
The gaming machine described in aspect E1-1.
[Aspect E1-3]
The display means can execute a third effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The third effect display is an effect display for displaying a specific image that changes according to the effect mode,
The gaming state suggesting effect suggests whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability varying state by changing the display mode of the specific image depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability varying state. ,
The gaming machine described in Aspect E1-1 or Aspect E1-2.
[Aspect E1-4]
The display means can execute a fourth effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The fourth effect display is an effect display that is carried out by the jackpot game executing means while the jackpot game is being executed, and a plurality of selected images suggesting a gaming state after the jackpot game are displayed. It suggests the degree of expectation of the game state after the jackpot game by the selected image selected from the inside,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3.
[Aspect E1-5]
Equipped with a production button that can be operated by the player,
The display means can execute a fifth effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed during execution of the jackpot game by the jackpot game executing means, and displays a plurality of characters selectable by the player, and the character selected from the plurality of characters. According to the operation of the effect button different button effect is performed, suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game after the end of the button effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4.

The meter effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. This meter effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the meter effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect to display an image.

[Meter production A]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but in the case other than when it is advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), in the meter effect A, on the display screen 7a, the decorative design variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this change effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this victory or defeat is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment is presented. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not it is a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a first-stage effect, an enemy character determination effect for specifying an opponent of the ally character CRA is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a still image TK of an enemy character that is an opponent and a still image MK of a teammate character are displayed side by side. The meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a battle start suggestive effect is executed as a continuation of the former effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(E), as a continuation of the first-stage effect, when the ally character CRA is independently displayed, a meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the teammate character CRA is ready to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving the player a feeling of tension. Can be given. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the battle effect. Also, the player moves from the first position to the second position during the battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, a meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled is executed. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of full meter filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration date image showing the expiration date of the button operation, A continuous hit suggestion image, which is displayed as “continuous hit!!!”, is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, as shown in FIG. 109(H), the meter image MT is switched to the full image MXG representing “MAX!!!!!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Meter production B]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but in the case other than when it is advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the meter effect B, on the display screen 7a, the decorative design variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this change effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this victory or defeat is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment is presented. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not it is a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a first-stage effect, as shown in FIG. 110(C), an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. That is, the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position, and the button image BTN and the operation suggestion image SSE represented as "press!!" .. At this time, an enemy character determination effect for specifying the opponent of the teammate character CRA may also be executed. Specifically, four enemy character images may be displayed in correspondence with four transparent members, and one enemy character image may be displayed on one transparent member. Thus, each enemy character image looks to the player as if it is displayed on four transparent members. The background colors of the four enemy characters may be changed in sequence by the roulette method, and the roulette may be stopped by the player operating the effect button 63, so that one enemy character may be selected. After that, the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members that form the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions away from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), a battle start suggestive effect is executed as a continuation of the former effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(E), as a continuation of the first-stage effect, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone, the meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the teammate character CRA is ready to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving the player a feeling of tension. Can be given. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the battle effect. Also, the player moves from the first position to the second position during the battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, a meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled is executed. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of full meter filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 110(G), a button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63 and an operation expiration date image TBI showing the expiration date of the button operation. , Continuous hit suggestion image RND displayed as “continuous hit!!!” is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the meter image MT is switched to the full image MXG representing “MAX!!!!!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Meter production C]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but in the case other than when it is advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111(A), in the meter effect C, on the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this change effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a and is displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this victory or defeat is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment is presented. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not it is a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a first-stage effect, advancement effect of the second movable accessory 15 is executed as shown in FIG. 111(C). That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the meter image MT. Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a battle start suggestive effect is executed as a continuation of the former effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a, and partly overlaps with the start suggestion image BKS.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(E), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone, the meter image re-moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA stands ready to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves leftward from the second position and stops at a predetermined position (third position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the left, thereby making the player nervous. It can give a feeling. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the battle effect. In addition, the player moves from the second position to the third position during the battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, a meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled is executed. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of full meter filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 111(G), a button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63 and an operation expiration date image TBI showing the expiration date of the button operation. , Continuous hit suggestion image RND displayed as “continuous hit!!!” is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the meter image MT is switched to the full image MXG representing “MAX!!!!!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Meter production D]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect D. The meter effect D represents the effect after the battle is lost in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. Similar to the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, although the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position, its illustration is omitted. In the first movable accessory 14, four transparent members are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at a retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted.

FIG. 112(A) corresponds to FIG. 109(F), FIG. 110(F), and FIG. 111(F) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. That is, during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, the meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled is executed. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB, so the meter is fully filled. Success or failure is suggested by the success or failure of. Here, the meter does not become full in a predetermined period, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a defeat effect in which the teammate character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(C), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At this time, the lost teammate character CRA is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the meter image MT is re-displayed in a state in which the decorative design is continuously stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At this time, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the reach is formed in the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 112(F), after that, as shown in FIG. 112(G), a decorative pattern disappearance effect in which the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a is executed. At this time, a meter image movement effect is also performed. Specifically, when the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the special reach effect finally starts, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The timing at which the meter image MT moves may be the same as or different from the timing at which the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a. The meter image MT may be moved before the disappearance of the decorative design, or may be moved after the disappearance of the decorative design.

As shown in the next FIG. 112(H), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a pre-stage effect of the battle effect. This battle start suggestive effect corresponds to FIG. 109(D), FIG. 110(D), and FIG. 111(D) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. However, the difference is that the meter image MT has already moved to the second position. After that, the first stage effect of the battle effect shown in FIG. 109(E), FIG. 110(E), and FIG. 111(E) and the in-battle effect shown in FIG. 109(F), FIG. 110(F), and FIG. 111(F). Is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the meter is full, and the victory effect in which the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of meter production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109(A) and (B), a first effect in which the meter image MT is displayed during a decorative effect variation effect, and a figure after the first effect. As shown in 109 (D) to (G), it is possible to execute the second effect in which the battle effect is executed while the meter image is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109(D) to (G) and FIGS. 111(A) to (B), the meter image MT is at least one of the first effect and the second effect. Are displayed at different positions. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109(A), in the first effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 109(E). In the second effect, the meter image MT moves from the first position on the display screen 7a to the second position. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109(B) to (C), the meter image MT is continuously displayed during the transition from the first effect to the second effect. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the battle effect includes an effect in which the meter image MT is switched to another image (for example, the full tank image MXG). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the first movable accessory 14 is provided, and at the time of shifting from the first effect to the second effect, at least a part of the meter image MT is The fourth effect covered with the transparent portion of the first movable accessory 14 can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of meter production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The meter image MT shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 is an example, and the configuration of the meter image MT is not limited to the above. For example, the meter image MT may be a circular shape like a meter of a car, or may be an image that digitally displays numbers. Further, a plurality of meter images MT may be displayed. For example, the remaining energy of the enemy character CRB and the remaining character CRA may be displayed. Further, the meter image MT may be arranged at a position other than the above-mentioned position, or may move in a direction other than the above-mentioned direction.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the meter effects shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the meter effect A of FIG. 109, when the effects of FIGS. 109(C) and 109(I), the effect that the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a may be performed as shown in FIG. 110(C). ..
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 109 to 112, the battle effect has been described as including not only the effect representing the event itself that decides the win/loss, but also the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. However, the battle effect represents the event itself that determines the win or loss, and may be interpreted as not including the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect before and after the event.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image used during battle production,
A first effect in which the meter image is displayed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern,
A game machine characterized in that after the first effect, a second effect in which the battle effect is executed can be executed while the meter image is being displayed.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image is displayed at different positions from each other in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the first effect, the meter image is displayed at the first position of the display means,
In the second effect, the meter image moves from the first position to the second position of the display means.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image is continuously displayed during the transition from the first effect to the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the battle effect, an effect in which the meter image is switched to another image is included.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
It has a movable accessory,
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a fourth effect in which at least a part of the meter image is covered by the movable accessory when the first effect is transferred to the second effect.

The related image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. This related image display effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the related image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Related image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration thereof is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at a retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the highly accurate and short time game "OARO rush" that is started after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described as the case where the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), in the related image display effect A, the highly accurate short time game start suggestion image KJS, which is displayed as "OARRO rush start!" The image MGU is displayed. Then, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 113(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the highly accurate short time game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or imaginary creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. Here, the plurality of character images represent different targets (people). On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promoting image SES displayed as “Select character!”, and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, it is displayed such that the character image farther from the selected character image has a smaller size. That is, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the character images adjacent to the character images on the outer side are displayed so as to be the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 113(B) to 113(D) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 113(B) to 113(D), a state in which the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice is shown. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN. In other words, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the selection promotion image SES.

When one character is selected (adoption decision) from the plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 113(E) is displayed. The adoption determination screen displays a determination notification image KHG for notifying that the selection of one character is completed, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged, and a background image HKG in which the selected character is displayed. To be done. On the recruitment determination screen, the selection promotion image SES displayed as “Select character!!” and the right-handing suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character “decision” and covers the selection promotion image SES that is displayed as “Select character!!”. This allows the player to easily visually judge that the selection of the character is completed. The enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES that is displayed as “Select character!” after selecting the character, and thus it is possible to visually and easily determine that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed by being superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give an impression of having a visually complicated structure and to improve the interest. Further, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglasses man”) is displayed after selection, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the character has been selected.

After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 113(F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During the change effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this win or loss is decided, an effect in which a plurality of characters are confronted as in this embodiment is given. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses in the confrontation (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first-stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 113(H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. After that, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!!” is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side to the center of the display screen 7a, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all the characters are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. The success or failure is suggested by the success or failure.

As shown in FIG. 113(I), when the meter is fully filled, an effect in which the selected character wins is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 113(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Related image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect B.
Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration thereof is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at a retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the high accuracy short time game "Alphabet Rush" which is started after the jackpot game is finished, and is explained as the case where the player hits the right and aims for the special 2 prize.

As shown in FIG. 114(A), in the related image display effect B, the high-precision short time game start suggestion image KJS, which is displayed as “Alphabet Rush Start!” on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game ends, and the right hit suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. Then, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 114(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the highly accurate short game (alphabet rush) starting from this time. Here, an uppercase alphabet is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or imaginary creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images (alphabet images) are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected and selected character. An enlarged image KUD in which (alphabet) is enlarged and displayed, a selection promoting image SES in which “Select the alphabet!”, and a right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four alphabet images) that are candidates for selectable characters (alphabets) are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, an arrow is displayed above the character image in the currently selected state (selected) among the plurality of character images. In response to the operation of the select button 68 by the player, the arrow moves and the character image being selected is switched. In FIGS. 114(B) to 114(D), when the “right” button of the select button 68 is pressed twice, the character image (alphabet) selected by the arrow is sequentially switched to the right image. It is shown.

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image (alphabet) in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. According to the operation of the select button 68 by the player, the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched. 114B to 114D show that the "right" button of the select button 68 is pressed twice, so that the alphabets represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the selected alphabet. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

When one character (alphabet) is selected (adoption decision) from the plurality of characters (alphabet) by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 114(E) is displayed. The adoption determination screen displays a determination notification image KHG for notifying that one alphabet has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected alphabet is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected alphabet is displayed. It On the adoption determination screen, the selection promotion image SES that is displayed as "Select the alphabet!" and the right-handing suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character "decision", and covers the selection promotion image SES that "Select the alphabet!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that the selection of the character (alphabet) is completed. The enlarged image KUD covers the selection promoting image SES that is displayed as “Select the alphabet!” after selecting the alphabet, and thus it is possible to visually and easily determine that the character (alphabet) is selected. Further, since the selected character (alphabet) is displayed by being superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complexly structured impression and to improve the interest.

After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 114(F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this change effect, the background image HKG of the selected character (alphabet) and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Even at this time, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. A roulette effect in which one character is selected from a plurality of characters (alphabet) as in the present embodiment is given as an event that determines the outcome. In this case, whether or not the jackpot is a big hit can be notified depending on whether or not a specific alphabet (for example, the selected alphabet) is selected by the roulette (event result). Other events that determine the outcome include fighting and competition wins and losses, success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), and trump and rock-paper-scissors wins and losses. Here, the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event (roulette) itself, but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 114(H), as the battle effect, a roulette effect for selecting one from a plurality of selected alphabets is displayed.

In the battle effect shown in FIG. 114(H), first, as a first-stage effect, a battle start suggestive image BKS represented as "roulette start!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and a roulette image RG is displayed. It The roulette represented by the roulette image RG starts to rotate after being displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), an effect of sticking an arrow on the roulette wheel being opened is performed. Whether or not the arrow hits the selected character (alphabet) indicates whether or not it is a big hit. When the arrow sticks into the selected character (alphabet) as shown in FIG. 114(H), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode as shown in FIG. 114(J).

[Related image display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration thereof is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at a retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration thereof is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the highly accurate and short time game "OARO rush" that is started after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described as the case where the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), in the related image display effect A, the high-precision short time game start suggestion image KJS, which is displayed as "OARO rush start!" The image MGU is displayed. Then, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 115(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the highly accurate short time game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or imaginary creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promoting image SES displayed as “Select character!”, and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, it is displayed such that the character image farther from the selected character image has a smaller size. That is, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the character images adjacent to the character images on the outer side are displayed so as to be the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 115(B) to 115(D), a state in which the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice is shown. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 115(B) to 115(D), a state in which the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice is shown. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (adoption decision) from the plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 115(E) is displayed. The adoption determination screen includes a determination notification image KHG for notifying that one character has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which something related to the selected character is displayed. And are displayed. Here, a part (sunglasses) of the selected character is shown in the background image HKG. The background image HKG need not be a part or all of the selected character itself as long as it is related to the selected character. On the recruitment determination screen, the selection promotion image SES displayed as “Select character!!” and the right-handing suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character “decision” and covers the selection promotion image SES that is displayed as “Select character!!”. This allows the player to easily visually judge that the selection of the character is completed. The enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES that is displayed as “Select character!” after selecting the character, and thus it is possible to visually and easily determine that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed by being superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give an impression of having a visually complicated structure and to improve the interest. Further, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglasses man”) is displayed after selection, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the character has been selected.

After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 115(F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During the change effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if something related to the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a and indicates to the player what the selected character is. Here, the name of the selected character is shown. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this win or loss is decided, an effect in which a plurality of characters are confronted as in this embodiment is given. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses in the confrontation (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first-stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 115(H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. Then, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side to the center of the display screen 7a, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all the characters are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. The success or failure is suggested by the success or failure.

As shown in FIG. 115(I), when the meter is not fully filled, an effect of losing the selected character is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Related image display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when the state where the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members forming the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each of them has an image display region capable of switching an image to be described later between a visible state and a visually difficult state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but in the case other than when it is advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the highly accurate and short time game "OARO rush" that is started after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described as the case where the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), in the related image display effect D, the high-precision short time game start suggestion image KJS, which is displayed as “OARO rush start!!” on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game, and the right hit suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. Then, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 116(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the highly accurate short time game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or imaginary creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promoting image SES displayed as “Select character!”, and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed so as to be positioned higher than the other character images. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 116(B) and 116(C) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 116(B) and 116(C), a state in which the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice is shown. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (decided to be adopted) from the plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, after the character is selected, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 116(D). The decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. During the change effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative design, the display of the decorative design disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and the event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative design that is variably displayed becomes a jackpot or a lost design It is a suggestive production. As an event in which this win or loss is decided, an effect in which a plurality of characters are confronted as in this embodiment is given. In this case, depending on whether a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses in the confrontation (event result), it is possible to notify whether or not a big hit. Other examples of events that determine the outcome include success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), win/loss of roulette, and win/loss of playing cards and rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only an effect representing the event itself but also a front effect and a second effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character are confronted with each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first-stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. Then, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Battle start!!” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side to the center of the display screen 7a, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative design variation effect and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all the characters are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. The success or failure is suggested by the success or failure. During a battle between the selected character and the opponent, as shown in FIG. 116(G), a button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration date image TBI showing the expiration date of the button operation, and “ A continuous hit suggestion image RND, which is displayed as "continuous hit!!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the meter image MT is switched to the full image MXG representing “MAX!!!!!”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transparent members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve interest. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of related image display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113B to 113D, a first effect in which a plurality of character images representing different objects are displayed, and a plurality of character images after the first effect. When one character image is selected from the character images, the second effect in which the background image HKG and the icon image ICN related to the selected character image are displayed, as shown in FIG. 113(F). Can be performed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), in the second effect, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN that are related to the selected character image and have different contents are displayed. To be done. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the icon image ICN. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the background image HKG. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113B to 113D, in the first effect, the selection promotion image SES that urges one character image to be selected from a plurality of character images is overlapped. Button image BTN is displayed, and by operating the effect button 63, the selected character image of the plurality of character images is changed to be larger than the others. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when one character image is selected from a plurality of character images by operating the effect button 63, the selection promotion image SES is overlaid and the selection is completed. The determination notification image KHG indicating that is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of related image display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
A plurality of character images shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, respectively, different faces and different alphabets are shown. As described above, "a plurality of character images represent different objects" is not limited to representing different types of objects such as faces, cars, and characters, and may be of the same type. The same type of object is, for example, a human face of the same type, but is a different target as long as it is the face of another person. Objects with different angles correspond to different objects.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the related image display effects of FIGS. 113 to 116 may be combined as appropriate, or some of the contents may not be provided.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode E2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a target image representing a predetermined target,
A first effect in which a plurality of target images representing different targets are displayed,
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images after the first effect, a second effect in which a related image related to the selected target image is displayed can be executed. Characteristic gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
In the second effect, a plurality of the related images, each of which is related to the selected target image and has different contents, are displayed.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
One of the plurality of related images is an icon image related to the selected target image. The gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3,
The gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of related images is a background image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image showing the appearance of the operation means,
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed so as to overlap with a selection promotion image that prompts the user to select one target image from the plurality of predetermined images,
A game machine characterized in that a selected target image among the plurality of target images is changed by an operation of the operation means.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-5,
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images by the operation of the operation unit,
A game machine characterized in that a selection completion image indicating that selection has been completed is displayed so as to overlap the selection promotion image.

The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. This battle effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the battle effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This battle effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one time change effect). It should be noted that the battle effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Battle production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In the battle effect A, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117(A). In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestive effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect (FIG. 117(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 117(F)) described later is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a teammate character determination effect can be executed. This teammate character determination effect indicates that the character making the preemptive attack has been selected as the teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA makes a preemptive attack on the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a and all areas become the first area AR1. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and it is shown that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB in the first strike.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the friend character CRA has transformed and won the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the jackpot pattern array is displayed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot notification effect indicating that the jackpot is to be hit is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 117(F). This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character making the preemptive attack is decided as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the preemptive attack against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. The enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2, and a state in which the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA during the first strike is shown.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle victory effect described above (FIG. 117(E)) or the battle defeat effect described below can be executed.

After the enemy character decision effect, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the detachment symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the detachment notification effect indicating that the detachment is present is executed.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118(A). In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestive effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect (FIG. 118(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 118(F)) described later is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a teammate character determination effect can be executed. This teammate character determination effect indicates that the character making the preemptive attack has been selected as the teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA makes a preemptive attack on the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a and all areas become the first area AR1. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and it is shown that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB in the first strike.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the friend character CRA has transformed and won the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the jackpot pattern array is displayed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot notification effect indicating that the jackpot is to be hit is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 118(F). This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character making the preemptive attack is decided as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the preemptive attack against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. The enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2, and a state in which the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA during the first strike is shown.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 118(E)) or the below-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the detachment symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the detachment notification effect indicating that the detachment is present is executed.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestive effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. Further, in the first character selection effect, the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL, and more specifically, is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. Further, in the second character selection effect, the button image BTN is continuously displayed. In this case, in this case, the button image BTN is at the same position as the first character selection effect, and the button image BTN has not moved. The boundary line KL moves within a certain range of the button image BTN. Note that the boundary line KL is not limited to this, and may be moved outside the certain range of the button image BTN. In addition, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect (FIG. 119(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 119(F)) described later is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a teammate character determination effect can be executed. This teammate character determination effect indicates that the character making the preemptive attack has been selected as the teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA makes a preemptive attack on the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a and all areas become the first area AR1. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and it is shown that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB in the first strike.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the friend character CRA has transformed and won the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the jackpot pattern array is displayed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot notification effect indicating that the jackpot is to be hit is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character making the preemptive attack is decided as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the preemptive attack against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. The enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2, and a state in which the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA during the first strike is shown.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 119(E)) or the below-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the detachment symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the detachment notification effect indicating that the detachment is present is executed.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestive effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Further, as the first character selection effect, the meter image XF2 is displayed. The meter image XF2 is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a and represents the meter value. The meter value of the meter image XF2 is shown by a cross hatch in the figure. The meter value of the meter image XF2 suggests the jackpot expectation, and the meter value may increase as the area of the first region AR1 increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

Further, in the second character selection effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases as the area of the first area AR1 increases.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect (FIG. 120(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 120(F)) described later is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120(D), an ally character determination effect can be executed. This teammate character determination effect indicates that the character making the preemptive attack has been selected as the teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA makes a preemptive attack on the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a and all areas become the first area AR1. The ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and it is shown that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB in the first strike.

In addition, in the teammate character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the jackpot probability sharply increases, that is, the jackpot is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the friend character CRA has transformed and won the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the jackpot pattern array is displayed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot notification effect indicating that the jackpot is to be hit is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character making the preemptive attack is decided as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the preemptive attack against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. The enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2, and a state in which the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA during the first strike is shown.

In the enemy character determination rendering, the meter value of the meter image XF2 changes depending on the superiority or inferiority of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. When the ally character CRA becomes dominant, the meter value rises and the ally character CRA becomes inferior. Does not rise.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle victory effect described above (FIG. 120(E)) or the battle defeat effect described below can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 120(G), the battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the detachment symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the detachment notification effect indicating that the detachment is present is executed.

In the battle effect D, if the area of the first area AR1 is increased, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is increased accordingly. However, if the area of the first area AR1 is decreased, the meter image XF2 is increased accordingly. The meter value of may be lowered. That is, the meter value of the meter image XF2 may correspond to the enlargement/reduction of the area of the first region AR1.

In the battle effects A to D, other effects (such as other battle effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
In addition, in the battle effects A to D, the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect may be repeated.
In the battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation level is changed according to the size of the area of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2. That is, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, compared to when the area of the first area AR1 is smaller than the area of the second area AR2, it is a big hit. It has a high expectation. That is, the jackpot expectation is suggested based on the area of the first region AR1 (second region AR2).
Further, in the battle effects A to D, the first area AR1 may be easily expanded or difficult to be expanded depending on the type of the character appearing in the first area AR1 or the second area AR2. In other words, the first area AR1 may be expanded. The jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on the type of character appearing in the area AR1 or the second area AR2.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of battle production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, and then the first area AR1 and the second area AR2. An effect of changing the area of the area AR2 is performed. According to this configuration, a moving effect can be executed by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2). According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation level changes due to the change in the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above battle effects A to D, the character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1. According to this configuration, a moving effect can be executed by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and at the same time, a moving effect can be executed by the movement of the character, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You can

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned battle effect D, the meter image XF2 is displayed when the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect change the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2). According to this configuration, a moving effect can be executed by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and a moving effect can also be executed by the meter value of the meter image XF2. Can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-described battle effect D, the size of the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) is reflected in the meter value of the meter image XF2 in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the size of the first area AR1, the jackpot expectation level changes depending on the meter value of the meter image XF2, so that the player can be excited and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

[Effect 6]
In the above-mentioned battle effect D, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2 in the character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX and the area of the first area AR1 becomes When the area is smaller than the area of the two regions AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is smaller than MAX. According to this configuration, if the area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the jackpot expectation level is increased. It is possible to give attention to the movement, give a great excitement to the player, and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a battle production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, after the second character selection effect, the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 further increase or decrease, and the first area AR1. You may make it the effect that the size of the 2nd area|region AR2 fluctuates. Furthermore, after that, the character determination effect may be performed by making the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 the same.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
The second display effect is an effect of changing the areas of the first display region and the second display region,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the combination effect, a jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on the area of the first display region in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
In the first display area, a character is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a meter display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the size of the area of the first display region of the second display effect is reflected in the meter value of the meter display.

[Aspect XF-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is larger than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display. Is set as a first value, and the area of the first display area of the second display effect is smaller than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is set to the first value. A second value smaller than,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The cracking effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This cracking effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a crack effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This cracking effect is performed during one variation (one variation effect) of the special symbol. The cracking effect may be performed during a plurality of changes in the special symbol (a plurality of changing effects).

[Splitting A]
121: is a figure for demonstrating the crack production A.
In the split effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an obtained payout display XG2, a right hit suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display that suggests that the player is in a rush (continuous churn). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of game balls that the player acquired during the rush (during consecutive chan). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requests (recommends) the player to make a right-handed hit. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right hit suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen cracking display GW reaches the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as if it has cracked (like a defect). (Displayed as missing). On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW and does not look cracked (there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121C, a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 121(C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 121(D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character “Gekiatsu” which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Splitting B]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect B.
In the split effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an obtained payout display XG2, a right hit suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display that suggests that the player is in a rush (continuous churn). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of game balls that the player acquired during the rush (during consecutive chan). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requests (recommends) the player to make a right-handed hit. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right hit suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen cracking display GW reaches the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as if it has cracked (like a defect). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW and does not look cracked (there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 122(C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 122(D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character “Gekiatsu” which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), the missing part character appearance effect is executed. In this missing part character appearance effect, the character XG6 is displayed in the screen crack display GW.
Further, in the missing portion character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 are moving on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Splitting effect C]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the cracking effect C.
In the split effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an obtained payout display XG2, a right hit suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display that suggests that the player is in a rush (continuous churn). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of game balls that the player acquired during the rush (during consecutive chan). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requests (recommends) the player to make a right-handed hit. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right hit suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen cracking display GW reaches the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as if it has cracked (like a defect). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW and does not look cracked (there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 123(C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 123(D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character “Gekiatsu” which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a missing character appearance effect is executed. In this missing character appearance effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen crack display GW. In this character image XG7, the character "This!?" is displayed, which suggests that it may be a big hit.
In the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Cracking D]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect D.
In the split effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display count suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an obtained payout display XG2, a right hit suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display that suggests that the player is in a rush (continuous churn). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of game balls that the player acquired during the rush (during consecutive chan). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requests (recommends) the player to make a right-handed hit. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right hit suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen cracking display GW reaches the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as if it has cracked (like a defect). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW and does not look cracked (there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 124(C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In the border character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the border between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 124(D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character “Gekiatsu” which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), an effect effect is executed. In this effect effect, the effect image XG8 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display. This effect image XG8 is moving on the boundary in a fluid manner. This effect image XG8 may be continuously arranged around the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display, or may be partly around the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display. It may be arranged in a desired manner.
Further, in this effect effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen crack display GW. In this character image XG7, the character "This!?" is displayed, which suggests that it may be a big hit. Further, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

It should be noted that in the above-mentioned cracking effects A to D, other effects (such as other cracking effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
In addition, in the cracking effects A to D, the screen cracking display GW causes a predetermined image (for example, a chance image or a character) to be cracked (as if it is missing) in addition to the rush suggestion display XG1 and the acquired payout display XG2. ) May be displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of a crack production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the cracking effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the various images are displayed on the display screen 7a by the decorative symbol variation effect, the screen cracking effect in which the screen cracking display GW is displayed is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a part of the image such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C is displayed by the screen cracking display GW. According to this configuration, due to the loss display, an image display having a different taste from usual is displayed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the screen cracking effect, a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by the screen cracking display GW. .. According to this structure, an image display having a different taste from the usual due to the loss display of the image including the character can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the screen cracking effect, a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the non-screen cracking display character are included. A portion other than the image is displayed as missing by the screen crack display GW. According to this configuration, an image display having a different taste from the usual one can be performed due to the loss display of a portion other than the image including the character and the image including the non-screen cracked display, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen cracking display GW and the non-screen cracking display. According to this configuration, since the new character image is displayed at the boundary portion while the loss is displayed, it is possible to perform various displays and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the cracking effects A to D, the character XG4 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen cracking display GW and the non-screen cracking display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, since the new character is displayed at the boundary portion while the loss is displayed, it is possible to perform various displays and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the cracking effects B to D, the character XG6 is newly displayed in the screen cracking display GW in the missing character appearance effect. According to this configuration, since the character XG6 is displayed in the screen crack display GW, various displays can be performed while the loss display is performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification example of a crack production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the split effects A to D, the boundary character appearance effect is executed after the boundary character appearance effect, but the boundary character appearance effect may be executed after the boundary character appearance effect.

[Modification 2]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the front side of the screen cracking display GW, but not limited to this, it is displayed on the back side of the screen cracking display GW, and the character XG4. May be displayed so as to be hidden in the screen crack display GW.

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the front side of the screen cracking display GW, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed on the back side of the screen cracking display GW. A part of the image XG5 may be displayed so as to be hidden by the screen crack display GW.

[Modification 4]
The cracking effects A to D have been executed in the probability changing state (during rush (during consecutive chanting)) advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the normal game state or the time saving game state that is not the probability changing state. May be carried out. In this case, the screen crack display GW lacks a predetermined image.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined display area,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a loss display in which a part of the predetermined display area is displayed as if it is lost.
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed and the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
The predetermined display area has a character area including characters,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of displaying a part of the character area of the predetermined display area in a defective state is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is displayed in which a part of the character area of the predetermined display area and a part of the predetermined display area other than the character area are displayed in a missing state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a first boundary portion between a defect display area in which a defect is displayed in the predetermined display area and a non-missing display area in which a defect is not displayed in the predetermined display area is provided. A new character will appear,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of newly causing a character to appear at a second boundary portion between the loss display area and the non-loss display area of the predetermined display area is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-5,
In the combination effect, an effect of causing a new character to appear in the loss display area of the predetermined display area is performed in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The meter/button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This meter button effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), for example, It is executed at the time of starting the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, in this meter/button effect, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in association with the player's operation of the effect button. It is a production that suggests the degree.

[Meter button production A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the meter/button effect A.
In the meter/button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 125(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 125(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 125D described later), and the meter area EM3A has a meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is represented by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 125(B) and displayed as the button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hit) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 125(C), on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH produces an afterimage like a fireball. While moving, it moves in all directions, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. Then, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the degree of increase of the meter value, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125(B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT that indicates the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestion effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 125(D), and it is shown that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. In other words, in this jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125(B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. In the jackpot suggestion effect, the character MGL of MAX (indicating a jackpot) indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, it is possible for the player to feel a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the reach effect (variation concerned) shown in FIG. 125(B) has been a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

On the other hand, instead of the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125(E), the loss suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125(G) may be executed. This loss suggestion effect is that, as a result of the player operating the effect button 63 in the meter effect shown in FIG. 125(D), the meter value of the meter image EM1A does not become full as shown in FIG. 125(G). It is carried out when In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125(B) becomes a loss (reach loss) because the meter value is not full. In the presentation of suggestion of loss, the character MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL of LOSE, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot will not be a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect shows that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 125(A) is lost after reaching the reach in FIG. 125(B) (reach lost). .. In this example, "757" is shown as the lost symbol array.

[Meter button production B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the meter/button effect B.
In the meter/button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the decorative symbol variable effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 126A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 126(A). In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. In addition, this reach symbol array is "8↓8", when it becomes a jackpot symbol array "888", it is a symbol array that is usually a jackpot, and in a regular jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game is over. The game state becomes a low-probability time-shortened state (low-probability high base state) until it is played 100 times, and thereafter becomes a low-probability low base state (normal state).
Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 126D described later), and the meter area EM3A has a meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is represented by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126C, the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 126B and displayed as the button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hit) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 126(C), on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG is displayed. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH produces an afterimage like a fireball. While moving, it moves in all directions, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. The degree of increase in the meter value indicates the jackpot expectation degree, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126(B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. The meter value (hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126D is displayed in blue, for example.
In addition, a meter MAT that indicates the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the probability variation big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 126D, and it is shown that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. In other words, in this probability variation jackpot suggesting effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126(B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. Here, the color of the meter value (cross-hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126(E) has a higher degree of expectation than blue (a privilege more advantageous than blue is given from blue shown in FIG. 126(D). (High probability) For example, it is displayed in red. In other words, in this probability variation jackpot suggestion effect, the reach symbol array “8↓8” which is usually a jackpot in the reach effect shown in FIG. 126B is shown because the color of the meter value has changed from blue to red. Despite that, it suggests that the result will be a sudden change jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that goes into a highly accurate short time state (highly accurate and high base state) after the jackpot game is over until the gaming state hits the next time. That is, this probability variation jackpot suggestion suggests that the probability variation jackpot will be achieved because the meter value is full and the color of the meter value changes from blue to red. In the probability variation jackpot suggestion effect, a character MGL of MAX (indicating a jackpot) MGL indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, it is possible for the player to feel a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This normal jackpot design temporary stop effect shows that the result of the reach effect (variation concerned) shown in FIG. 126(B) is provisionally stopped with the normal jackpot design. In other words, in this normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect, "888" as the regular jackpot symbol array is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are slightly rocked up and down (2 or 3 frames). It has been temporarily stopped. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(G), the full rotation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this full-rotation effect, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array that has been temporarily stopped in the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 126(F) is synchronized with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , As shown by an arrow YA, an effect of scrolling at a low speed downward so that the player can visually recognize is performed. Therefore, in this full rotation effect, only the jackpot symbol arrangement is sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the probability variation jackpot final effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation jackpot final effect, as a result of the full rotation effect shown in FIG. 126(G), “777” as the probability variation jackpot symbol array has been fixedly stopped and has been a big hit. In other words, the normal jackpot design that has been stopped is promoted to a probability variation jackpot design by the full rotation effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "probable variation jackpot ~!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the probability variation jackpot due to the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect.

[Meter button production C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the meter/button effect C.
In the meter/button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 127A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variable effect shown in FIG. 127(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 127D described later), and the meter area EM3A has a meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is represented by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 127B and displayed as the button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 127C, on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH produces an afterimage like a fireball. While moving, it moves in all directions, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the jackpot expectation degree, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127(B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT that indicates the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the suggestion of loss is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss suggestive effect is that when the player operates the effect button 63 in the meter effect shown in FIG. 127(D), the meter value of the meter image EM1A does not become full as shown in FIG. 127(E). It is carried out when In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127(B) is lost (reach loss) because the meter value is not full. In the presentation of suggestion of loss, the character MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL of LOSE, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot will not be a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a lost symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol temporary stop effect shows that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 127(A) is temporarily stopped by the lost symbol after reaching the reach in FIG. 127(B). ing. That is, in this lost symbol temporary stop effect, the lost symbol array "757" is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are slightly stopped vertically (2 or 3 frames) in a temporarily stopped state. Has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(G), the revived auditor effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this revival effect production, the second movable accessory 15 (which is located at the home position) in the state where the lost symbol array “757” is temporarily stopped in the lost symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 127(F). (Refer to FIG. 1) advances to the central advance position on the display screen 7a. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the central advance position, the second movable accessory 15 has a part of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R "7" and the decorative symbol 8C of the lost symbol array "757". All "5" are covered invisible. However, "7" of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R is partially covered in a readable manner so that the player can see "7" from the uncovered portion. By this revival effect production, the player has a feeling that he will be resurrected from a loss to a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the revived auditor effect shown in FIG. 127(G), this jackpot final effect is temporarily stopped at the lost symbol array "757" when the second movable accessory 15 retreats from the central advance position to the home position. It is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed to the jackpot symbol array “777” and fixedly stopped. In other words, the lost symbol that has been stopped changes to a jackpot symbol due to the rendition role product effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

[Meter button production D]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the meter/button effect D.
In the meter/button effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a time-saving (electric support) start effect that is performed when the jackpot game is over is executed. In this time saving start effect, the character "time saving start!" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player is urged to hit right under the character "time saving start!" The right-pointing arrow YAR of is displayed. In addition, the character "right hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YAR. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to right-handedly, so that the electric ball 22 is frequently opened and the player can easily win the prize. Can be made. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 21, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the game balls are won in the second starting opening 21 in a time saving state, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how you did it. In this example, "7↓7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement. Further, the letters "REACH!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. In the decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol is in the right symbol display area. 8R is displayed. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L first stops, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Note that FIG. 128B shows that the decorative symbol 8CR is changing (scrolling downward).
Further, during execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A provided with a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 128D described later), and the meter area EM3A has a meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is represented by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 128(B), and an image in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle each other is displayed. Here, in this battle effect, the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack against the enemy character CRB. That is, in this battle production, the character who has made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike is suggested. Therefore, this battle effect suggests that the teammate character CRA wins the battle. Further, in the battle effect, the meter value of the meter image EM1A increases when the teammate character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the jackpot expectation degree, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128(B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot suggestion effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128C, and as a result, the ally character CRA wins and the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full. It has been shown that That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the meter value becomes full. Then, in this jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125(B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. In addition, in the center of the display screen 7a, the character "win!" indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed together with the teammate character CRA. By displaying the character "Victory!" and the meter value being full, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a big hit (the advantageous privilege is given to the player).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the result of the reach effect (variation concerned) shown in FIG. 128(B) has been a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "Big hit ~!" are displayed. By this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

On the other hand, the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F) may be executed instead of the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C). This battle effect is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 128(B), and an image in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle each other is displayed. Here, in this battle effect, it is shown that the enemy character CRB has made a preemptive attack against the ally character CRA. That is, in this battle production, the character who has made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike is suggested. Therefore, this battle effect suggests that the enemy character CRB wins the battle. Further, in the battle effect, the meter value of the meter image EM1A increases when the teammate character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the jackpot expectation degree, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128(B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 1/3. That is, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F), it can be known from the degree of increase in the meter value that the enemy character CRB is superior to the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C) in the battle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(G), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 128(F) battle and the button image BOG. Is displayed. This button operation instruction effect is an effect that is performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack, like the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F). Therefore, when the teammate character CRA makes a preemptive attack as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128C, as described above, after the battle effect shown in FIG. The jackpot suggestion effect shown in () is executed. Specifically, in this button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "continuous hit!" is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(H), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. This meter effect is also an effect that is performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike. Specifically, in this meter effect, when the player starts the operation (continuous hit) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 128G, on the display screen 7a, from the button image BOG itself, or A moving display object IH is generated around the button image BOG. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH produces an afterimage like a fireball. While moving, it moves in all directions, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased from about 1/3 shown in FIG. 128G to about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT that indicates the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross hatching portion) rises with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed so that it is full. Then, when this meter effect is completed, thereafter, effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 125(E) to 125(H) described above are performed, but description thereof will be omitted here.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the meter/button effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in association with the player's operation of the effect button. The degree of increase of the meter value indicates the expectation of jackpot. (For example, if the meter value rises to the full tank, it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed (the higher the meter value, the easier the advantageous privilege is given to the player). With this configuration, the player can technically intervene by operating the effect button as instructed in order to increase the meter value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, a moving display object is generated from the button image or around the button image in association with the player's operation of the effect button to display the meter image. The meter value is configured to increase when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. According to this configuration, the meter value rises when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image, so that the player is overwhelmed by whether or not the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. Become. In addition, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the moving display object is configured to be generated each time the player operates the effect button. According to this structure, the player can perform technical intervention by operating (continuously hitting) more effect buttons in order to generate more moving display objects and raise the meter value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, a battle effect in which a player-side ally character and an enemy character compete with each other is displayed while the meter image is displayed, and when the ally character wins, a button is pressed. It is configured to fill the meter value of the meter image without displaying the image and suggest the jackpot confirmation. According to this configuration, the player is overwhelmed by the movement of the teammate character in the battle production and pays close attention to the battle production with great interest in whether or not the teammate character wins. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the display mode (color) of the meter value is changed, the result is obtained even though the reach pattern array that normally gives a big hit is shown. Is configured so that it is suggested that it will become a probability jackpot. According to this configuration, the player looks at the meter image with great interest in whether or not the display mode (color) of the meter value changes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, in the state where the lost symbol array is displayed, when a predetermined accessory moves so as to cover a part of the lost symbol array invisibly, The displayed defective symbol array is configured to change to the jackpot symbol array when the accessory is retracted from the advance position, that is, when the symbol array is completely visible. According to this configuration, the player pays great attention to whether or not the accessory is movable in the state where the lost symbol array is displayed. In particular, in the case where the lost symbol arrangement is the reach lost symbol arrangement, if the accessory covers part of the reach lost symbol arrangement invisible, if the same symbol forming the reach is covered in a legible manner, the game It is possible to make people who have a big hit feel stronger. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the meter/button effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing during execution of the reach effect, but this is, for example, reach. May occur at the same time as, or before or after the reach is established. Further, at the time of reach, the reach is not displayed by the decorative pattern, but it may be displayed small in both corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit when the meter value is full, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, even when the meter value is not full, or when the meter value is equal to or more than a predetermined value, it may be suggested that the jackpot is a big hit.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the color of the meter value changes, it is suggested that the probability variation jackpot will be obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, if the display mode such as the shape or size of the meter value is not limited to the color and the display mode changes, it may be suggested that the probability variation jackpot will be achieved. Further, the bonus is not limited to the probability variation jackpot, and other benefits may be suggested. Further, an image such as a character (for example, MAX) displayed together with the meter image when the color of the meter value is changed may be changed to the same color as the meter value. Furthermore, the timing at which the color of the meter value changes is arbitrary, for example, it may be changed while the meter value is rising, or when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button becomes a predetermined time or less. It may be changed, may be changed when the meter value rises by a predetermined value or more, or may be changed when the meter value is full.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, after the provisional stop with the lost design, the lost design is changed (revival) to the jackpot design by moving the accessory, but the present invention is It is not limited to this. For example, after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol, it may be changed (revival) to a jackpot symbol by changing again (pseudo-link). Alternatively, after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol, when a predetermined image such as cut-in is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be changed (revised).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the battle effect, the character who has made the first strike wins the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a character who has performed a predetermined technique may win the battle, or a character who has continuously performed the technique may win the battle. Alternatively, a character that defends the issued technique and counterattacks may win the battle. That is, it is only necessary for the character to perform the battle to win in the battle in a predetermined manner.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, in the button operation instruction effect, the player is made to repeatedly hit the effect button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the instruction content of the button operation may be determined in association with the type of the teammate character that appears in the battle effect (for example, when the teammate character is A, continuous hits, when the teammate character is B, long press, etc.). In addition, the player may be allowed to perform a plurality of types of button operations. For example, a plurality of types of button operation instructions, such as continuous hits, long presses, and blows, may be performed in one button operation instruction effect.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F5-1]
A production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
Production buttons that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of a meter image,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a button image display,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is to display the button image while the meter image is being displayed, increase the meter value of the meter image in association with the player's operation of the effect button, and increase the meter value. Suggests the jackpot expectations,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F5-2]
In the first effect, a moving display object is generated from the button image or in the vicinity of the button image in association with the operation of the effect button by the player, and the meter value of the meter image is the moving display object. Rises by reaching the display area of the meter image,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1.
[Aspect F5-3]
The moving display object is generated each time the player operates the effect button,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect F5-4]
When the meter value of the previous meter image is full, it suggests a big hit confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-3.
[Aspect F5-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to perform a battle effect in which a player-side ally character and an enemy character compete while the meter image is displayed, and when the ally character wins, display the button image. Without suggesting jackpot confirmation by filling the meter value of the previous meter image to full tank,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-4.
[Other modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects and effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning drum type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a sparrow ball game machine instead of a pachinko game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as the operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the image representing the sword member 64 is used to effect the display effect. The display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

Moreover, you may combine two or more production examples and/or modification examples among the above-mentioned several production examples and/or modification examples. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed by the sub display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the aspect described above is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes equivalents thereof.

1... Gaming machine 3... Gaming area 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C... relevant hold image (hold icon)
14... 1st movable accessory 15... 2nd movable accessory 18... 3rd movable accessory 20... 1st starting opening (1st entrance)
21... 2nd starting opening (2nd entrance)
81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

Display means capable of executing a plurality of effects by displaying a plurality of displays,
Production buttons that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of a meter image,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a button image display,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is to display the button image while the meter image is being displayed, increase the meter value of the meter image in association with the player's operation of the effect button, and increase the meter value. Suggests the jackpot expectations,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to perform a battle effect in which a player-side ally character and an enemy character compete against each other while the meter image is being displayed, and when the ally character wins, display the button image. Without suggesting the jackpot confirmation by filling the meter value of the meter image to full, the button image is displayed when the win of the enemy character is suggested , and is related to the player's operation of the effect button. Then, increase the meter value of the meter image, and suggest a jackpot expectation degree by the degree of increase of the meter value,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images